M-Series 1.27

CENTROID ™
M-SERIES
Operator's Manual
CNC10 Version 1.27

Rev. 051004
U.S. Patent #6490500

© 2004 Centroid Corp. Howard, PA 16841
CNC Control Information Sheet
Fill out the following and fax back to Centroid Tech support 814-353-9265. Date: _________
Company name: _________________________ Your name: ____________________________
Address: ______________________________ City: _________________ State:____ Zip: ________
Phone #: ________________ Fax #: __________________
Control Serial Number K_________ Software Version: _______ Approx. purchase date: __________
Dealer: ____________________________ Machine Brand: __________________________
Machine type (check below)

Knee Mill Machining Center
Bed Mill Lathe
Router Other
Please indicate the messages (word for word) in the message window:
Message Window Example Error Messages

1
2
3
4
5
Describe the symptoms. What does the system do (or not do)?
System Voltages (requires an AC/DC voltmeter)

Source L1/L2________VAC
Source L1/L3________ VAC
Source L2/L3________ VAC
Drive Voltage ______ VDC Measured at terminal 9 (GND) and 10 (+Vm) on the servo drive (E-Stop
Released).
Phase Converter Yes ____ No ____
Control Parameters
Please fill in the parameter tables below. To get to the parameter screens:
1. Go to the Main screen of CNC10 software (this is the screen that appears when your system is first turned on).
2. Press F1 - Setup to enter the Setup screen.
3. Press F3 - Config to enter the Configuration screen.
4. Type "137" in the window which asks for the password. Press ENTER to accept this.
5. Press F2 – Mach for Machine Configuration.
6. Press F1 – Jog for Jog Parameters or F2 – Motor for Motor Parameters
Jog Parameters
Slow Jog Fast Jog Max Rate Dead Start Delta Vmax
Axis (inches/minute) (inches/minute) (inches/minute) (inches/minute) (inches/minute)
X
Y
Z
4th
5th
Motor Parameters
Motor Encoder Limit Home Direction
Axis Label revs/inch counts/rev Lash - + - + Reversed Travel
1
2
3
4
5
PID parameters: Press ESC at the machine configuration screen. Then press F4 - PID
Axis Kp Ki Kd Limit Kg Kv1 Ka Accel. Max. Vel.

1
2
3
4
5
To obtain the control configuration info, press ESC at the PID screen, and then press F1 - Contrl
DRO display units:_______ PLC type:__________

Machine units:__________ Console type (Jog Panel Type):__________
Max spindle (high range):__________ Jog panel required:____________
Min spindle (high range):__________ Screen blank delay:___________
Machine home at powerup:________ Remote Drive & Directory: ________________
Parameters: To obtain following parameter info, press ESC at the Control Configuration screen, and then press F3 -
Parms
Param Value Param Value Param Value Param Value Param Value Param Value
# # # # # #
21 23 29 40 56 58
22 24 30 41 57 59
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 - Introduction CHAPTER 9 - Probing
Window Description 1-1 Part Setup with Probing 9-1
Conventions 1-3 Calibrating the Probe Tip Diameter 9-2
Machine Home 1-4 Probing Cycles 9-2
Probe Parameters 9-6
CHAPTER 2 - Operator Panels
M-Series Jog Panel 2-1 CHAPTER 10 - Intercon Software
Keyboard Jog Panel 2-6 Intercon Main Screen 10-1
Keyboard Shortcut Keys 2-9 Insert Operation 10-6
Graphics 10-37
CHAPTER 3 – CNC10 Main Screen Math Help 10-39
Option Descriptions 3-1 Importing DXF files 10-46
Intercon Tutorial #1 10-52
CHAPTER 4 - Part Setup Intercon Tutorial #2 10-60
Operation Description 4-1
Part Setup Examples 4-4 CHAPTER 11 – CNC Program Codes
Work Coordinate Systems Configuration 4-5 Miscellaneous CNC Program Symbols 11-1
Coordinate Systems Rotation 4-6
CHAPTER 12 - G-codes
CHAPTER 5 - Tool Setup G-Code Quick Reference 12-1
Offset Library 5-1 G-Code Descriptions 12-2
Automatic Tool Measurement 5-3
Setting up Tool Height Offsets 5-3 CHAPTER 13 - M functions
Tool Library 5-4 Macro M functions 13-1
CHAPTER 6 – Running a Job CHAPTER 14 – Configuration

Job Running Menu 6-1 Password 14-1
Canceling a Job in Progress 6-2 Control Configuration 14-2
Resuming a Canceled Job 6-2 Machine Configuration 14-4
Run Menu 6-3 Machine Parameters 14-8
Power Feed 6-5 PID Configuration 14-33
Handwheel Configuration 14-35
CHAPTER 7 - The Utility Menu
F1 - Format 7-1 CHAPTER 15 – CNC10 Messages
F2 – Update, F3 - Backup 7-1 CNC10 Message Descriptions 15-1
F4 - Restore 7-2
F5 - File Ops, F6 – User Maint. 7-2
F7 – Report 7-2
F8 – Options, F9 – Log 7-3
CHAPTER 8 – Digitize
Grid Digitize 8-2
Radial Digitize 8-6
Contour Digitize 8-10
Chapter 1
Introduction
Window Description
The CNC10 display screen is separated into five areas called windows. A sample screen is shown below for
reference. The five windows are the DRO display window, the status window, the message window, the options
window, and the user window. The information that each window displays is described in detail in the following
sections.
DRO Display Window
Status
Window
Message
Window
User
Window
Options
Window
DRO display
The DRO display contains the digital read out of the current position of the tool. The display is configurable for
number of axes and desired display units of measure (see Chapter 14). The bars under each axis are the load meters
and represent the amount of power being supplied to the drive for that axis. The display of axis load meters is
configured by machine parameter 143 – see Chapter 14 for specific information. See also “Hot Keys” later in this
chapter.
Distance to Go DRO
The distance to go DRO is located below the main DRO. This display shows the distance to go to complete the
current movement. The display of distance to go is controlled by parameter 143. See Chapter 14 for details. See
also “Hot Keys” in chapter 2.
M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 1-1

Status window
The first line in the status window contains the name of the currently loaded job file. Below the job name are the
Tool Number, Program Number, Feedrate Override, Spindle Speed, and Feed Hold indicators. The Feedrate
Override indicator displays the current override percentage set on the Jog Panel. The Feedrate label will turn RED
if the rapid override is turn off. If your machine is equipped with a variable frequency spindle drive (inverter), the
Spindle indicator will display the current spindle speed. The Feed Hold indicator displays the current status
(on/off) of FEED HOLD. See Chapter 2 for descriptions of the Feed Hold Button, Feedrate Override Knob, and
Spindle controls. For a description of the Program Number see G65 in Chapter 12 or M98 in Chapter 13.
The Part Cnt and Elapsed Time indicators appear when CYCLE START is pressed while a job is running. The Part
Count indicator displays the number of times the currently loaded job has been run. They count increments by one
after the completion of a run. If a job is canceled prematurely, the part count will not be incremented. The Part #
counter shows the how many parts have been run, with an up/down arrow displayed to indicate the counting
direction. See the run menu for more information on the Part Cnt and Part # setting.
The Part Time indicator displays how much time has passed since the CYCLE START button was pressed. The
indicator will help you to determine how long it takes to mill a particular part. The timer will not stop until the job
is canceled. It will continue to count for optional stops, tool changes, FEED HOLD, etc.
Message window
The message window is divided into a message section and a prompt section. The prompt section of the window is
the lowest text line in the window and will display prompts to the user. For example, the prompt 'Press CYCLE
START to start job' is displayed on the prompt line after power-up.
The message section is the top four text lines of the message window. This section will display warnings, errors, or
status messages. The newest messages always appear on the lowest of the four lines. Old messages are shifted up
until they disappear off the top of the message window. When old messages scroll out of view, a scroll bar will
appear on the right side of the window. When the scroll bar is visible you may use the up and down arrow keys to
view older messages. See Chapter 15 for a description of the CNC10 error and status messages.
Options window
Options are selected by pressing the function key indicated in the box. For example, on the main screen, pressing
the function key F5 - CAM selects the CAM option.
User window
The information contained in this window is dependent upon on the operation the user is performing on the control.
If no action is being taken, the window is empty.
For instance, when the CYCLE START button is pressed and a job is processed correctly, up to 11 lines of G codes
will be displayed in this window for the user to observe during the Run of the part. All of the part zeros, the tool
library setup, and the Digitizing/Probing information are entered in by the user in this window.

Conventions
*Bold capitalized characters represent keystrokes. For example, the A key is written as A, and the enter key is
written as ENTER. The "Escape" key is written as ESC. Key combinations such as ALT- D mean that you should
press and hold ALT then press D.
*All data entry screens in the M-Series Control use F10 to save changes.
*Any menu in the M-Series Control can be exited by pressing ESC. This will take you back to the previous menu.
This also usually discards any changes you have made in that menu.
*All program examples and software use the standard Cartesian coordinate system (see the figure below). If you
are facing the mill, the X-axis is defined positive to your right; the Y-axis is defined positive to the mill; and the Z-
axis is defined positive upward, perpendicular to the XY plane.
*The direction of motion is defined by the CUTTER motion, not the TABLE motion.
*CW stands for clockwise, and CCW stands for counterclockwise.

Machine Home
When the M-Series control is first started, the Main screen will appear as below.
Before you can run any jobs, you must set the machine home position. If your machine has home/limit switches,
reference marks or safe hard stops, the control can automatically home itself. If your machine has reference marks,
jog the machine until the reference marks are lined up, (see below), before you press CYCLE START to begin the
automatic homing sequence. The control will execute the G-codes in a file called cnc10m.hom in the c:\cnc10
directory. By default, this file contains commands to home Z in the plus direction, then X in the minus and Y in the
plus direction.
Typical Reference Marks
If your machine does not have home/limit switches or safe hard stops, the following message will appear instead.
In this case you must move the machine to it’s home position yourself, using either the jog keys or the handwheels.
Once all axes are at their home positions, press CYCLE START to set machine home.

Mill M and G Codes
This is a summary list of M and G codes. See Chapters 12 – 13 for more information.
M00 Stop for operator G00 Rapid Positioning

M01 Optional Stop for operator G01 Linear Interpolation
M02 Restart Program G02 Circular or Helical Interpolation CW
M03 Spindle on CW G03 Circular or Helical Interpolation CCW
M04 Spindle on CCW G04 Dwell
M05 Spindle off G09 Exact Stop
M06 Start Tool Change G10 Parameter Setting
M07 Mist Coolant on G17 Circular Interpolation Plane Selection XY
M08 Flood Coolant on G18 Circular Interpolation Plane Selection ZX
M09 Coolant off G19 Circular Interpolation Plane Selection YZ
M10 Clamp on G20 Select Inch Units
M11 Clamp off G21 Select Metric Units
M14 Swing Arm Pot Up G28 Return to Reference Point
M15 Unclamp tool, air on G29 Return from Reference Point
M16 Unclamp tool, air off G30 Return to Secondary Reference Point
M18 Home tool changer G40 Cutter Compensation Cancel
M19 Orient spindle G41 Cutter Compensation Left
M20 Pick up tool G42 Cutter Compensation Right
M21 Move head up G43 Tool Length Compensation (+)
M22 Move head to ATC level G44 Tool Length Compensation (-)
M23 Rotate carousel G49 Tool Length Compensation Cancel
M24 Start tool put back G50 Scaling/Mirroring Off (Optional)
M25 Move to Z home G51 Scaling/Mirroring On (Optional)
M26 Set axis home G52 Offset Local Coordinate System Origin
M39 Air drill G53 Rapid Position in Machine Coordinates
M50 Index tool plus G54 Select Work Coordinate System #1
M51 Index tool minus G55 Select Work Coordinate System #2
M80 Carousel in G56 Select Work Coordinate System #3
M81 Carousel out G57 Select Work Coordinate System #4
M91 Move to minus home G58 Select Work Coordinate System #5
M92 Move to plus home G59 Select Work Coordinate System #6
M93 Release motor power G61 Exact Stop Mode
M94 Turn on input X G64 Cutting Mode
M95 Turn off input X G65 Call Macro
M98 Call subprogram G68 Rotate
M99 Return from subprogram G69 Cancel Rotate
M100 Wait for input to open G73 High Speed Peck Drilling
M101 Wait for input to close G74 Counter Tapping
M102 Restart program G80 Canned Cycle Cancel
M103 Programmed action timer G81 Drilling and Spot Drilling
M104 Cancel programmed action timer G82 Drill with Dwell
M105 Move minus to switch G83 Deep Hole Drilling
M106 Move plus to switch G84 Tapping
M107 Output BCD tool number G85 Boring
M108 Enable override controls G89 Boring with Dwell
M109 Disable override controls G90 Absolute Positioning Mode
M115 Protected probing move G91 Incremental positioning Mode
M116 Protected probing move G92 Set Absolute position
M120 Open data file (overwrite existing file) G98 Initial Point Return
M121 Open data file (append to existing file) G99 R Point Return
M122 Record position(s) and/or comment in data field G117 Rotation of Plane Selection XY
M123 Record value and/or comment in data field G118 Rotation of Plane Selection ZX
M125 Protected probing move G119 Rotation of Plane Selection YZ
M126 Protected probing move

Chapter 2
Operator Panels
M-Series Jog Panel
Fig 1 - M-Series Jog Panel
The M-Series operator panel is a sealed membrane

keyboard that enables you to control various machine
operations and functions. The panel contains
momentary membrane switches, which are used in
combination with LED indicators to indicate the status
of the machine functions.
M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 1

The M-Series operator panel is a sealed membrane keyboard that enables you to control various machine operations
and functions. The panel contains momentary membrane switches. The M-Series jog panel can be customized as to
the location of various keys. The jog panel displayed in the figure above is representative of a default configuration
found on most M-series controls.
Axis Jog Buttons

X+ X- Y+ Y- Z+ Z- 4TH+ 4TH-
The yellow X, Y, Z, and 4TH keys are momentary switches for jogging each of the four axes of the machine. There
are two buttons for each axis (+/-). Only one axis can be jogged at a time.
Slow/Fast
The slow/fast key is located in the center of the Axis Motion Controls section and is labeled with the
turtle and rabbit icon shown to the right. The turtle represents slow jogging mode. When SLOW jog is
selected (LED on) and a jog button is pressed, the axis moves at the slow jog rate. If FAST jog is
selected, the axis will move at the fast jog rate. See Chapter 14 for information on setting the fast and
slow jog rates for each axis.
Inc/Cont
INC/CONT selects between incremental and continuous jogging. Pressing the key will toggle between these two
modes. The LED is lit when INC is selected. When set to INC jog and a jog button is pressed, the axis will move the
current jog increment distance and stop. The jog button must be released and then pressed again before any further
axis movement can occur. The LED is not lit when set to CONT. If CONT jog is selected and an axis jog button is
pressed, the axis will move continuously until the button is released.
* NOTE: The jog buttons will not operate if the M-Series CNC software is not running, or a job (a CNC program) is
running.
x1, x10, x100

Press any one of these keys to set the jog increment amount. The amount you select is the distance the control will
move an axis if you make an incremental jog (x1=0.0001", x10=0.0010" and x100=0.0100"). You may select only one
jog increment at a time, and the current jog increment is indicated by the key that has a lit LED. The jog increment
you select is for all axes; you cannot set separate jog increments for each axis. The jog increment also selects the
distance the control will move an axis for each click of the MPG handwheel.
MPG
The MPG is housed in a separate hand-held unit. Press the MPG key to set the control jog to respond to the
MPG handwheel, if equipped. When selected, the LED will be on. Select the Jog Increment and desired
axis and slowly turn the wheel. When the LED is not lit, the MPG is disabled and the jog panel is on.
* WARNING: Do not spin the handwheel too quickly. Damage to the machine or part may result.

Tool Check
Press TOOL CHECK while no program is running to move the Z-axis to its home position/G28 position. Press
TOOL CHECK while a program is running to abort the currently running program. The control will stop normal
program movement, pull Z to its home position, clear all M-functions, and automatically display the Resume Job
Screen. From the Resume Job Screen, you can change tool settings (height offsets, diameter offsets, etc.) and resume
the job with the new tool settings.
Single Block
The SINGLE BLOCK key selects between auto and single block mode. When the SINGLE BLOCK LED is on, the
single block mode has been enabled. Single Block mode allows you to run a program line by line by pressing CYCLE
START after each block. While in block mode you can select auto mode at any time. While in auto mode and a
program is running you cannot select single block mode. Auto mode runs the loaded program after CYCLE START is
pressed. Auto mode is the default (LED off).
Cycle Start
When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the M-400/M-39 Control will immediately begin processing
the current program at the beginning and will prompt you to press the CYCLE START button again to
begin execution of the program. After an M0, M1, M2, or M6 is encountered in the program, the message
“Press CYCLE START to continue” will be displayed on the screen, and the M-400/M-39 Control will
wait until you press the CYCLE START button before continuing program execution.
* NOTE: Pressing CYCLE START will cause the M-Series Control to start moving the axes immediately without
further warning. Be certain that you are ready to start the program when you press this button. Pressing the FEED
HOLD button or the CYCLE CANCEL button will stop any movement if CYCLE START is pressed accidentally.
Cycle Cancel
Press CYCLE CANCEL to abort the currently running program. The control will stop movement
immediately, clear all M-functions, and return to the Main Screen. It is recommended that you press FEED
HOLD first before CYCLE CANCEL. If you press CYCLE CANCEL, program execution will stop; if
you wish to restart the program you must rerun the entire program or use the search function. See search function
operation in Chapter 3.
Coolant Control Keys

The coolant control keys are located in a single row between the Spindle Control section and Axis Motion Controls
section of the jog panel.
Coolant Auto/Manual selection. This key will toggle between automatic and manual control of
coolant. In automatic mode, M7 (Mist) and M8 (Flood) can be used in G-code programs to select
the coolant type to be enabled. In manual mode, flood coolant and mist coolant are controlled by
separate keys
When switching from automatic to manual mode, both flood and mist coolant are turned off automatically.
Coolant Flood
In manual coolant control mode, flood coolant can be toggled off and on by pressing this key. The LED will
be on when flood control is selected in either automatic or manual mode.

Coolant Mist
In manual coolant control mode, mist coolant can be toggled off and on by pressing this key. The LED will
be on when mist control is selected in either automatic or manual mode.
Auxiliary Function Keys (AUX1 – AUX12)

The M-Series jog panel has nine auxiliary keys, some of which may be defined by customized systems.
Spindle Controls
Spindle (CW/CCW)
The SPINDLE CLOCKWISE/COUNTERCLOCKWISE keys determine the direction the
spindle will turn if it is started manually. If the spindle is started automatically, the direction keys
are ignored and the spindle runs according to the program. The default direction is CW.
Spindle Override Controls

Speed increase. Pressing this key will increase the spindle speed by 10% of the commanded speed in Auto
spindle mode, limited by the maximum speed or 200% of commanded speed, whichever is less. For manual
spindle mode, the spindle speed is increased by 5% of the maximum spindle speed (up to the maximum
speed). The LED is on if the spindle speed is set above the 100% point.
Pressing this key will set the spindle speed at the 100% point, which is defined as the commanded speed in
Auto spindle mode, or ½ the maximum spindle speed in manual mode. The LED will be on when the
spindle is at the 100% point.
Speed decrease. Pressing this key will decrease the spindle speed by 10% of the commanded speed in Auto
spindle mode, limited to 10% of commanded speed. For manual spindle mode, the spindle speed is
decreased by 5% of the maximum spindle speed down to 5% of maximum. The LED is on if the spindle
speed is set below the 100% point.
Spindle (Auto/Man)
This key selects whether the spindle will operate under program control (automatic) or under operator control
(manual). When the LED is lit, the spindle is under automatic control. If the LED is off, the spindle is under manual
control. Pressing the SPINDLE (AUTO/MAN) key will toggle it from AUTO to MAN and back again. The default
is AUTO mode.
Spin Start
Press the SPIN START key when manual spindle mode is selected to cause the spindle to start rotating.
Press SPIN START when automatic mode is selected to restart the spindle if it has been paused with
SPIN STOP.
Spin Stop
Press the SPIN STOP key when manual spindle mode is selected to stop the spindle. Press SPIN STOP
when automatic mode is selected to pause spindle rotation and can be restarted with SPIN START.

* WARNING: SPIN STOP should only be pressed during FEED HOLD or when a program is NOT running.
Feedrate Override
This knob controls the percentage of the programmed Feedrate that you can use during feedrate cutting moves: lines,
arcs, canned cycles, etc. This percentage can be from 2% to 200%.
Feed Hold
Feed Hold decelerates motion of the current movement to a stop, pausing the job that is currently running. Pressing
CYCLE START will continue the movement from the stopped location.
Emergency Stop
EMERGENCY STOP releases the power to all the axes and cancels the current job immediately upon being pressed.
EMERGENCY STOP also resets certain faults if the fault condition has been fixed or cleared.
* WARNING: On some machines, the Z or W axis will sometimes fall due to the lack of power.
Notes about operator panels

The behavior of the control system in response to the functions listed above for the M-Series jog panel is dependant
upon optional software options, the PLC program, machine parameters, and hardware wiring of the system. It is
possible that the functioning explained in this chapter does not apply to a particular control system or that it may differ
in some aspects.

Keyboard Jog Panel
The keyboard may be used as a jog panel. Press Alt-J to display and enable the keyboard jog panel. The jog panel
appears as shown below:
For full functionality of the keyboard jog panel, “Keyboard” must be selected as the console type in the Console
Configuration menu.
The jog panel shows the mapping of keys to jogging functions. Normally, the keyboard performs menu navigation and
data entry functions. The keyboard can jog the axes only when the keyboard jog panel is displayed. Ctrl and Alt
functions are available, for the most part, even when the jog panel is not shown.
The status window in the upper right corner of the screen displays the jogging mode (continuous/incremental),
incremental step size, and jog speed (fast/slow). In continuous mode, the jog keys start movement when pressed and
movement stops when you release the key. In incremental mode, the axis will move the indicated incremental step
amount.
As shown in the picture above, the jog keys are located in the cursor key block to the right of the main keyboard and to
the left of the numeric keypad. If a jog key controls an axis, it will be overlaid with the axis symbol (“X”, “Y”, etc.)
The jog keys are the arrow keys, Insert, Delete, Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down.

The remaining keys are described below:
Legend Key(s) Function Description Availability (Notes)

Alt S Cycle Start Same as Cycle Start. Always, with few
exceptions. (1)
Esc Cycle Same as Cycle Cancel. During a job run;

Cancel otherwise, Esc is used
to exit CNC10
menus.
Space Feed Hold Turns Feed Hold on and off The space key may
or be used for editing
Alt H and may not be
available at all times.
Alt-H is always
available.
Alt J Start/Exit Invokes or exits the jog panel. Always, with few
Panel exceptions. (1)
Ctrl F1 Aux 1 – Executes the corresponding Aux function and Always, with few
- Aux 12 signals the PLC. A custom PLC program is exceptions. (1,3)
Ctrl F12 required to act upon jog panel signals.
Alt C and Flood Alt C turns flood coolant on and off. Alt E Always, with few
Alt Q Coolant and turns mist coolant on and off. Both flood and exceptions. (1,3)
Mist mist may be on at the same time. Either key
Coolant automatically selects manual coolant mode.
If requested by CNC10, Alt C and Alt E will
select “Auto Coolant Mode”. Press either
when prompted.
Shift – or Feed Rate Decreases the feed rate override by 10%. Jog panel, job run,
Shift _ Override graphing, and some
–10% other times. (2,4)
Shift = or Feed Rate Increases the feed rate override by 10%. Jog panel, job run,
Shift+ Override graphing, and some
+10% other times. (2,4)
- Feed Rate Decreases the feed rate override by 1%. Jog panel, job run,
Override graphing, and some
–1% other times. (2,4)
= Feed Rate Increases the feed rate override by 1%. Jog panel, job run,
Override graphing, and some
+1% other times. (2,4)
Alt R and Spindle Alt R turns the spindle on clockwise if the Always, with few
Alt Q On/Off spindle is off; otherwise, it turns the spindle exceptions. (1,3)
CW/CCW off. Alt Q is similar except counter-
clockwise. Either will automatically select
manual spindle operation.
Alt A Spindle Toggles between automatic and manual Always, with few
Auto/ spindle operation. exceptions. (1,3)
Manual
Shift [ or Spindle Decreases the spindle override by 10%. Only in jog panel,
Shift { Override and during a job.
–10% (2,4)
Shift ] or Spindle Increases the spindle override by 10%. Only in jog panel,
Shift } Override and during a job. (2,
+10% 4)
Legend Key(s) Function Description Availability (Notes)
[ Spindle Decreases the spindle override by 1%. Only in jog panel,
Override and during a job.
–1% (2,4)
] Spindle Increases the spindle override by 1%. Only in jog panel,
Override and during a job.
+10% (2,4)
Alt O Tool Check Performs a tool check. Always, with few
exceptions. (1)
Alt W MPG on/off Turns MPG (handwheel) control on and off. Available most times
that jogging is
available.
| or \ Incremental/ Selects incremental or continuous jog mode. Only in jog panel.
Continuous Press again to select the opposite mode.
Jog
Selection
Ctrl (as Incremental/ Fast and temporary incremental/continuous Only in jog panel.
modifier) Continuous mode switch. Hold down simultaneously
Jog with a jog key. (This is like holding down the
Shift key to type a capital letter instead of
pressing Caps Lock.)
‘ or ~ Fast/ Slow Selects fast or slow jog mode. Press again to Only in jog panel.
Jog select the opposite mode.
Selection
Shift (as Fast/Slow Fast and temporary fast/slow mode switch. Only in jog panel.
modifier) Jog Hold down simultaneously with a jog key.
Selection (This is like holding down the Shift key to
type a capital letter instead of pressing Caps
Lock.)
, or < Increase Jog Changes incremental jog step from .0001 to Only in jog panel.
Step 10x .001 to .01, etc. (The “1” moves to the left in
the status window.) This also selects
handwheel speed.
. or > Decrease Changes incremental jog step from .1 to .01 to Only in jog panel.
Jog Step .001, etc. (The “1” moves to the right in the
10x status window.) This also selects handwheel
speed.
F1 – F10 F key pass- Exits the jog panel and executes the Where F keys are
thru corresponding F key. visible.
Notes:
Hot key. In general, the key can be used at any time. Some CNC10 menus may prevent the use of certain keys.
The console type in the console configuration menu must be set to “Keyboard” to use this key.
The PLC program must be programmed to support this key. Keyboard only systems have this support built-in.
Systems with other jog panels may not have this support.
Available if not in use by CNC10. For example, feed rate override can be adjusted from the main menu. If you are
editing a value in a table or menu, you cannot adjust feed rate override.
MDI and the Keyboard Jog Panel

Many of the keys used by the keyboard jog panel are also possible commands to MDI. To use the keyboard jog panel
functions in MDI, you must press Alt J. You may jog, use the handwheels, or any other jog panel function. Press Alt
J or Esc to return to MDI.

Keyboard Shortcut Keys
A computer style keyboard is supplied with most systems. This keyboard can be used as a jog panel. The keyboard
jog panel has many “hot keys”. Hot keys are keys that can be used at almost any time, with few exceptions. (Some
menus may prohibit their use.) CNC10 has many other hot keys in addition to the jog panel hot keys. The hot keys are
listed below.
Hot Keys
Hot Key Action

ALT A Spindle auto/manual*
ALT B Screen blanker on
ALT C Flood coolant on/off*
ALT D Switch between current position and machine position
CTRL D Switch DRO between position and distance to go
ALT E Mist coolant on/off*
ALT F Displays available system memory
ALT H Feed hold on/off*
ALT I PLC diagnostics
ALT J Enables keyboard jogging*
ALT K Displays current ATC tool bin location
ALT M MDI
ALT O Tool check*
ALT P Live PID display
CTRL P Clear max and min error display
ALT Q Spindle on/off counter-clockwise*
ALT R Spindle on/off clockwise*
ALT S Cycle start
ALT T Displays current motor temperature estimates
ALT V Displays current software version #
ALT W MPG on/off*
ALT + / ALT - Selects next/previous WCS, cycles through WCS 1-18**
ALT 1 - ALT 0 Selects WCS 1 – WCS 10**
ALT Tab Cycle through currently running applications
CTRL F1 - CTRL F12 Executes Aux function 1 – 12*
CTRL V Enables/disables Stall detection in PID Configuration
CTRL I Creates plcstate.txt when PLC diagnostics is displayed***
Notes:
* This is a keyboard jog panel function.
** Not available during jobs, in jog panel or while handwheels are engaged.
*** plcstate.txt file is saved in the cnc10 directory. It will be attached to the report when created.

Chapter 3
CNC10 Main Screen
Option Descriptions
F1 – Setup
This will bring up the Setup menu as shown below.
F1 - Part
This key displays the Part Setup menus that are explained in Chapter 4.
F2 - Tool
This key displays the Tool Setup menus that are explained in Chapter 5.
F3 - Config
This key displays the Configuration menu that is explained in Chapter 14.
F4 - Feed
This key displays the Feed menu that is discussed in Chapter 6.
F5 – 3rd Axis Toggle

This key will only be displayed if Machine parameter 130 is set. See Chapter 14 for the various settings.
F6 – 4th Axis Toggle

This key will only be displayed if Machine parameter 131 is set. See Chapter 14 for the various settings.
F7 – ATC
This key will only be displayed if Machine parameter 6 is set to 1.0. It has the same effect as the F7 - ATC key in
the Tool menus, which is to prompt for a tool number and then perform the actions required for an automatic tool
change cycle.
F2 – Load Job
This option allows you to specify the file name of the CNC program that you want to run next. On the Load Job
screen, the available keys are:
F1 – Floppy View files on the Floppy drive (a:\ directory)

F2 – Hard Drive View files on the Hard Drive (c:\cnc10\ncfiles directory)
F3 – Remote View the pre-designated “Remote” directory (usually a network directory.)
F5 – ICN View the intercon files on the Hard Drive (c:\intercon)
F6 – Dnload Download a file via an RS232 serial connection.
F7 – Upload Upload a file via an RS232 serial connection.
F10 – Accept Load the selected file.
Page Up Move the cursor back one page. (A page is 32 files)
Page Down Move the cursor forward one page.
END Select the last file in the list.
HOME Select the first file in the list.
Arrow Keys Move the cursor in the selected direction.
When the Load Job screen is first displayed, the initial list of files will come from the controller's hard drive. Press
F1 – Floppy Drive to switch to the controller's floppy drive, or press F3 - Remote to switch to the drive of a
computer through a network. Press F2 – Hard Drive to switch back to the Controller's hard drive. You can use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the file you want to load. Once the job file name you wish to load is displayed on
the "Job to load" line, press F10 - Accept.
See Remote Drive and Directory in Chapter 14 if you need to set up a default drive and directory for the Remote
feature.
Keys F6 - Dnload and F7 - Upload transfer files via legacy RS232 serial ports. In order to use F6 - Dnload and
F7 - Upload, you must first set up the serial port parameters. See Chapter 14 for details. To download a file, press
F6 - Dnload, enter the file name under which to save it, and begin the serial transmission at the far end. CNC10
will automatically close the connection and save the file when no more characters have been received for 2 seconds.
To upload a file, prepare the far end to receive the file, press F7 - Upload and enter the name of the file to send.
The transfer will begin immediately. Note: The RS232 download and upload functions provide no error
checking. Use slower baud rates to avoid errors. If you want fast, reliable, and effortless file transfers between
the control and other computers, use TCP/IP networking. USB storage devices are also very convenient and will
accept extremely large files. See Chapter 7 for a description of “File Ops” in the Utility Menu (F7 - Utility from
the main menu.)
Subdirectories are shown at the beginning of the list with square brackets, "[" and "]", around the name. If the
current directory is not the root directory, a parent directory reference is shown as the last item of the list, signified
by an up arrow next to the name.
Do NOT load non G-code files and attempt to run or edit them. This can cause serious damage to the
machine and controller, destroy the file, or cause personal injury.
F3 - MDI
Press F3 - MDI to directly enter M and G-codes one block at a time. Enter one line of M or G-codes and then press
CYCLE START. The controller will execute the command. It will then prompt you for another line. When you
are finished entering commands, press ESC. The Rapid Override function key F9 – Rapid on/off appears while in
MDI mode (see below).

Examples:
Block? G92X0Y0 ; Set the current XY position to 0,0
Block? M26 ; Set the current Z position as Z home
All of the functions of Part Setup and Power Feed can be performed in MDI mode by typing the
appropriate G and M-codes.
F4 - Run
Press F4 - Run to change the way your part program will run. See chapter 6 for more information concerning the
run menu.
F5 - CAM
Choose F5 - CAM from the Main Menu to load an installed CAM software package. Currently, the default CAM
system is Intercon (Interactive Conversational) software. When you exit Intercon, you will return to the M-Series
Control Main Screen. The posted Intercon program will be automatically loaded into CNC10.
F6 - Edit
The edit function from the Main Screen loads a text editor so that you may edit CNC files. Press F6 - Edit to load
the current job file. When you exit the text editor, you will return to the CNC10 Main Screen.
Attempting to edit files that contain non-printable characters may cause unexpected results. DO NOT edit the
CNC10 files cnc10m.cfg, cnc10m.prm, cnc10m.job, cnc10m.tl, cnc10m.ol, and cnc10m.wcs. These files will be
destroyed and all information lost if they are edited.
F7 - Utility
Press F7 - Utility to bring up the Utility Screen. This screen gives you several options from diagnostics to file
functions. See Chapter 7 for a detailed description of the utility operations.
F8 – Graph
This option plots the tool path of the current program loaded. Canned drilling cycles are shown in gray. Rapid
traverse movements are shown in red. Feedrate movements are shown in yellow.
The screen shows the following keys:

F1 - 2D/3D - Press this key to view your part isometrically (3D). An axis pointer indicates the current direction of
the view. To return back to the tri-planar view, press F1 again.
F2 - Rotate - Press this key in 3D mode to rotate your part. Use the keyboard arrow keys to rotate any direction.
OR
F2 - View - Press this key to change the planar view of your part. The view is indicated by TOP, RIGHT, or
FRONT shown at the top of the screen.
F3 - Range - Press this key to set the range of line numbers or block numbers to graph.
F4 - Time- Press this key to estimate the time needed to create part. It takes into account accelerations and
decelerations, but neglects tool change times.
F5 - Redraw- Press this key to redraw the part at any time.
F6 - Pan - Press this key to move the part around the screen. Once pressed, use the crosshairs to pick a location of
the part that will redraw at the center of the screen. Once a section is selected, press F6 again to continue panning.
F7 - Zoom In- Press these keys to zoom into the part relative to the center of the screen.
F8 - Zoom Out- Press these keys to zoom away from the part relative to the center of the screen.
F9 - Zoom All- Press this key to view the entire part fit inside the screen.
Turn the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE knob to control the speed of the graphing. To pause the tool path, turn the knob
counter-clockwise until it stops. Turn the knob clockwise to resume drawing.
F9 - Digitize
Press F9 - Digitiz to bring up the Digitize screen. This screen allows you to set up and run touch probe digitizing.
See Chapter 8 for a detailed description of the digitizing operation.
F10 - Shutdown
Press F10 – Shut Down to enter the Shutdown menu. This menu allows you to park the machine, poweroff the
control, start a command window or exit CNC10.
F1 Park
Press F10 - Park to park the machine at the end of the day for quicker machine homing at startup. Once F10 - Park
is selected, The CYCLE START key must be press to start machine movement. The park feature homes each axis,
at the maximum rate, to ¼ motor revolution from its home position.
F2 Poweroff
Press F2 – Power Off to properly shutdown the control. With most controls, this action turns off the control once
the system has prepared itself to be shutdown. Just like a desktop computer, the control should be properly
shutdown before turning off the power in order to reduce the risk of corrupting data on the hard drive.
NOTE: This option will only turn off the control. The machine itself will still need to be manually turned off.
F6 System Prompt
Press F6 – System Prompt to start a command window. From this window you can type CNC Linux commands at
a prompt. Type the command exit to exit the command window.
F9 Exit CNC10
Press F9 – Exit CNC10 to exit CNC10 software. Exiting CNC10 starts the CNC10 start menu. From this menu,
you can restart CNC10 by pressing F1 – CNC10.

Chapter 4
Part Setup
(F1 from Setup)
General
The Part Setup menu is used to set the part position or the coordinate system origin for the part.
F1 – Next Axis: will toggle to the next axis. If changes were made to the current axis, but not yet accepted, they
will be discarded.
F4 – Auto: Uses probe to automatically measure and set part position. Make sure your probe height and diameter
offsets are set for the tool number you assigned to the probe and that parameter 12 is set to that tool number. See
Chapter 8 for more details.
F5 – Probe: will open the probing operations menu. See Chapter 8 for details.
F6 – Prev WCS: will select the previous work coordinate. The position being set will only affect the currently
selected work coordinate.
F7 – Next WCS: will select the next work coordinate. The position being set will only affect the currently selected
work coordinate.
F8 - CSR: will open the CSR menu, which can be used to automatically detect coordinate system rotation. This
function key appears only when the software option for Coordinate System Rotation is unlocked.
F9 – WCS Table: will open the Work Coordinate System (WCS) Configuration screen. See the Work Coordinate
System Configuration section later in this chapter for a complete description.
F10 – Set: will accept the position for the current axis, correcting for edge finder diameter based on the approach
direction if appropriate. It will not automatically advance to the next axis.

Operation Description
Setting the part position establishes a coordinate system with an origin at the part zero.
The F1 - Next Axis option selects the axis to be defined next. This field toggles between axis X, Y, Z,4th, and 5th
Axes. For each axis you will see a graphic description of the parameters to be entered, as well as the corresponding
fields.
Setting up X or Y AXIS
Set Part Position
1) Select Axis with F1

2) Jog to Touch Off on Part
3) Edit the Value if Necessary
4) Press F10 to Set Position
Axis Part Edge Finder Approach

Position Diameter from
X 0.0000 0.0000 Left (-)
Part Position: enter the value of your part zero position or the offset.
Edge Finder Diameter: enter the diameter of the tool, or edge finder you are using to determine the part zero. The
value entered is stored.
Approach From: Toggle the direction the edge finder or probe is approaching the part.
*Note – Use the arrow keys to toggle between Part Position, Edge Finder Diameter, and Approach From options.
Setting up the Z AXIS

Set Part Position

Axis Part Tool

Position Number
Z 0.0000 0
Part Position: enter the value of your part zero position or the offset.
Tool Number: enter the tool number from the Tool Library that corresponds to the tool being used. When the Tool
Number field is set to a value other than zero, the controller uses the Height Offset for that tool from the Tool
Library to calculate the actual position.
Example 1 (You are using the reference tool to find the Z-axis part zero):
Set Tool Number to 0: setting the Tool Number to zero tells the controller that you are using the reference tool.
Example 2 (You are using a tool other than the reference tool, and not a ball nose cutter):
Set Tool Number to a number tool that is assigned in the tool library (make sure its height offset is set).
Example 3 (You are using a ball nose cutter, other than the reference tool):
Set Part Position to the position of the surface plus the nose radius of the ball nose cutter, set Tool Number to the
number this tool is assigned in the tool library.
The Tool and Offset libraries must be up to date before setting the Z-axis Part Zero.
Setting up the 4th or 5th AXIS
Set Part 0/Position

Axis Part Standoff Approach

Position Distance from
B 0.0000 0.0000 +
Position: enter the value of your part zero position or the offset.
Standoff Distance: this field is a generic parameter. Its physical meaning will depend on the specific nature of your
machine's fourth axis. It is the distance between the center of the tool and the point at which the tool is touching the
part surface.
Approach from: enter the direction the edge finder is approaching the part from. Enter the correct direction given
the nature of your 4th-Axis.
Using Multiple Work Coordinate Systems

If you will be using multiple work coordinates, you must set the part position separately for each work coordinate.
Follow the instructions above to set the position for each axis in the first coordinate system. Then move to the next
fixture and press F6 – Prev WCS to select the previous work coordinate or F7 – Next WCS to select the next work
coordinate. The currently selected coordinate system is displayed below the axis picture on the Part Setup screen.
It is also displayed above the DRO at all times. For a description on setting up each work coordinate, see the Work
Coordinate System Configuration section later in this chapter.

Part Setup Examples
Example 1: Setting the X-axis Part Zero with no offset (See diagram below)
If you wanted the left edge of the part to be the origin for the X-axis:
1. Move the Edge Finder to the left edge of the part

2. Press F1 – Next Axis until the Axis label displays 'X'
3. Move the cursor to the Edge Finder Diameter field
4. Type .25 and press ENTER
5. Press SPACE until Left (-) is displayed
6. Press F10 - Set to accept the values

Position Diameter From
X 0 0.25 Left (-)
Since no offset is being applied, Position is zero. The Edge Finder is approaching the part from the -X direction
and has a diameter of .25 inches. Once this data is entered and F10 - Set is pressed, the X-axis DRO display will
read -0.125. This means the center of the Edge Finder is sitting to the left (minus) of the part by 0.125 inches (half
of the Edge Finder Diameter).
This value is computed by: Position (Approach from) Edge Finder Diameter / 2.
Where (Approach from) is the sign of the approach direction. In other words, if the approach direction is minus,
then the value is: Position - Edge Finder Diameter / 2 = 0.0 - .25 / 2 = -0.125

Example 2: X-Axis origin offset into part 1 inch.
If you wanted the origin offset 1 inch into the part:
1. Move the Edge Finder to the left edge of the part

2. Press F1 – Next Axis until the axis field displays 'X'
3. Move the cursor to the Part Position field
4. Type -1 and press ENTER
5. Type .25 and press ENTER
6. Press SPACE until Left (-) is displayed
7. Press F10 - Set to accept the value

Position Diameter from
X -1 0.25 Left (-)
The Position value is relative to the current position of the Edge Finder. Part position equals -1.0 since the Edge
Finder is positioned 1 inch to the left (minus direction) of where you want the X-axis origin.
Another way to view the Part Position value is to assume the origin is already set at 1 inch into the part. In this
case, the Edge Finder would have to move -1 inches from where the origin is to get to the left edge of the part.
The Edge Finder is approaching the part from the -X direction and has a diameter of .25 inches. Once this data is
entered and F10 - Set is pressed, the X-axis DRO display will read -1.125. This means the center of the Edge
Finder is sitting to the left (minus) of the origin by 1.125 inches. The X-axis origin is now 1 inch into the part.
This value is computed by: Position (Approach from) Edge Finder Diameter / 2.
Where (Approach from) is the sign of the approach direction. In other words, if the approach direction is minus,
then the value is:
Position - Edge Finder Diameter / 2 = -1.0 - .25 / 2 = -1.125
Work Coordinate Systems (WCS) Configuration

Press F9 – WCS Table from the Part Setup screen to display the Work Coordinates System (WCS) menu. The
Work Coordinate Systems screen provides access to reference return points, coordinate system origins, and work
envelope. Make sure your Home position has been set properly. Otherwise, the positions of each coordinate
system will not be in the appropriate position.

When you enter the Work Coordinate System Configuration screen, the DRO display will automatically switch
over to machine coordinates as an aid to entering numbers. All the values on this screen are represented in machine
coordinates.
F1 - Reference Return Points

The F1 - Return key is used to set the reference return points for the machine.
The reference return points are used with the G28 and G30 codes (see Chapter 12). They are specified in machine
coordinates. The Z coordinate of the first reference point is also used as a Z home position by the M2, M6, and
M25 codes (see Chapter 13).
F2 - Origin
Use the F2 - Origin key to specify the locations (in machine coordinates) of the origins for all 18 work coordinate
systems. Pressing F1 – Next Table will allow you to view the other WCS (6 per page). This option is a
convenience and is not an absolute necessity for setting work coordinate system origins.
If the software option Coordinate System Rotation is unlocked, the CSR angle for each of the first six work
coordinate systems can also be set.
All coordinate systems are relative to Home position that is set during control power up. Note that the DRO while
in this screen shows the actual machine position relative to Home, not the location relative to the WCS origin.
F3 – Work Envelope
Use the F3 – Work Envel key to specify the ‘+’ and ‘-‘ work envelope locations (in machine coordinates) used in
conjunction with the G22 G code. The X, Y, Z and I, J, K parameters specified in the G22 G code are stored here,
so subsequent G22 codes do not need to specify the limits unless they change.
Note: The work envelope will only work in programmed moves. You will still be able to jog outside the work
envelope.
Coordinate System Rotation (CSR)

Coordinate System Rotation saves you time when setting up your part. Rather than clamping your part and
indicating the edge of the material to square it with the machine axes, you can use CSR to automatically rotate the
coordinate system to the angle of the part or fixture that was probed. This allows you to compensate for different
orientations.
Simply clamp your part, and then probe two points along either the X or Y-axis of the material using the process
described below.

F1 - Orient is used to select the orientation for the CSR measurement. There are four possible orientations, which
are: from the front (pictured above), the back, and the left and right sides.
F2 - Manual is used to determine the CSR angle without probing. The user jogs an edge finder to two positions
along one wall. These positions will be used for computing the CSR angle.
F3 - Zero Cur is used to set the CSR angle for the current WCS to zero.
F4 - Zero All is used to set all CSR angles to zero.
F6 - Prev WCS and F7 - Next WCS are used to cycle through the available WCS systems.
F9 - WCS Table is a shortcut to the Work Coordinate System Configuration Screen described above.
The instructions on how to perform a CSR measurement are numbered on the screen.
Distance: The distance the X-axis (in front or back orientation) or Y-axis (in right or left side orientation) will
move to probe the second point. If the distance is negative, the axis will be moved in the negative direction.
Clearance Amount: The distance the Z-axis will be moved upward when moving between the first probe point and
the second probe point. The clearance move will only be made when using the “Auto” option of the Movement
Between Points.
Movement Between Points can be toggled between Jog and Auto modes. In Auto mode, the clearing moves are
made automatically as well as the move to the second point. In Jog mode, a prompt will be displayed in the center
of the screen after the first point is probed.

Chapter 5
Tool Setup
(F2 from Setup)
Tool Setup allows you to specify information about the tools you will be using. Press F1 - Offset Library, to edit
the Height Offset and Diameter (H and D) values, or F2 - Tool Library to edit the tool descriptions.
Offset Library
The Offset Library file contains the values for the Height Offset and Diameter Numbers. For example, if entry
H01 has a value of -.25, a height offset of -.25 is applied when height offset 01 is referenced. If entry D01 shows a
value of 1.5, the diameter offset 01 has a diameter of 1.5 associated with it.
Press F1 – Z Ref to set the Z reference height. Press F2 - Manual to manually measure tools. If you purchased the
Automatic Tool Measurement (TT1) option, press F3 - Auto to automatically measure tool lengths. Press F5 -
+.001 or F6 - -.001 to adjust the selected offset. If you have an automatic tool changer installed, press F7 - ATC to
change tools. Press F10 - Save to save changes and exit, or ESC to exit without saving changes. If you have both
purchased the Automatic Tool Measurement (TT1) option and also have an automatic tool changer installed, then
you can press F4 - Auto to perform batch tool measuring, by entering a list of multiple tool numbers.
You can inspect and change any of the 200 Height Offset (H) values, and any of the 200 Diameter (D) values. In
most cases you will use the automatic tool length measurement features described below to set H values, and you
will enter D values manually, based on the known or measured diameters of your tools.
Note that H01 and D01, H02 and D02, H03 and D03, etc. are displayed together on the same line for convenience
only. The Height and Diameter Offset Numbers can be used independently; associations are made only in the Tool
Library.
Height Offset
This is the distance the control adjusts Z-axis positions when tool length compensation (G43 or G44) is used with a
particular H value. For example, if H001 is -1.0 and the job contains G43 H1, then CNC10 will shift all Z-axis
positions down 1.0 to compensate for the shorter tool.

To edit the Height Offset entries move to the desired height offset number with the arrow keys, Page Up, Page
Down, HOME, and END. You can choose to manually edit or automatically measure the value.
Height Offsets values are measured using the Z Reference position. The Z Reference position is the Z-axis position
when the tip of the reference tool is touching the work surface. The reference tool should always be the longest
tool.
The Height Offset value for end mills and drills is the difference between the Z-axis position when the tip of the
tool is touching the work surface and the Z Reference position. The Height offset value for ball nose and bull nose
cutters is the difference between the Z-axis position when the center of the tool is at the work surface and the Z
reference position. Because it is not possible to position the tool in this way, you must instead move the tip of the
tool to the work surface, and then manually edit the value to subtract the tool nose radius.
To manually edit a Height Offset value, simply type the desired value and press ENTER.
To manually measure Height Offset values, use the following procedure:
Establishing the Z reference position

Press F1 – Z Ref to select the Z Reference setting function.
Insert the longest tool into the tool holder (you can use the jog keys or the TOOL CHECK key to assist you).
Jog the tip of the tool down to the top of the work surface.
Press F10 - Save to save this Z Position as the Reference Position.
Measuring each tool height (Z position for tool minus Z position for Reference tool)
Insert the desired tool into the tool holder (Jog keys or the TOOL CHECK key can be used to assist you).
Jog the tip of the tool down to the top of the work surface.
If the tool is a drill or end mill, press F2 –Manual Measure to measure the height.
If the tool is a ball nose or bull nose cutter, press F2 – Manual Measure to measure the height, and then subtract
the tool nose radius.
After a tool height is measured, the next Height Offset entry is automatically selected.
When the edit is complete, press F10 - Save to save the Offset Library and Exit.
Examples (assuming Z Reference = -1.5):

If the tool position is -1.75, then the tool height = -0.25
If the tool position is -1.75 and nose radius is .25, then the tool height = -0.50
If the tool position is -2.25, then the tool height = -0.75
If the tool position is -2.75 and nose radius is .125, then the tool height = -1.375
Diameter
This field tells the control the distance to adjust when cutter diameter compensation (G41 or G42) is used with a
particular D value. For example, if D001 is 0.5 and the job contains G41 D1, CNC10 will adjust all X-Y positions
0.25 (half the tool diameter) to the left of the programmed tool path.
To edit the Diameter entries move to the desired diameter offset number with the arrow keys, Page Up,
Page Down, HOME, and END. You must manually edit the Diameter Offset value. Type the desired value and
then press the ENTER key.
You can make small adjustments to Height Offsets and Diameters using F5 - +.001 and F6 - -.001. Use the arrow
keys to highlight the value to be adjusted. Press F5 - +.001 to increase the offset value by 0.001" (or 0.02 mm in
Metric mode). Press F6 - -.001 to decrease the offset by the same amount. If the cut parts are undersized, use F5 -
+.001 to cut less material. If the cut parts are oversized, use F6 - -.001 to cut more material.

Automatic Tool Measurement
Z-minus single-surface probing, using the TT-1 tool touch-off post, is
available in the Tool Offset Library.
NOTE: Make sure the proper parameters are set as per Chapter 9,
and the detector is plugged in and is at the correct location on the
table!
WARNING: When first testing the TT-1, hold the TT-1 in hand and
touch the unit off the tool to confirm correct setup. Incorrect setup
may cause damage to the machine, tool and/or operator.
Setting the Z Reference:

Using the longest tool for the job to be run or the designated reference
tool, press F1- Z Ref, then F3 and then CYCLE START. The Z-axis
will then move down until the tool touch-off is detected. The Z reference
will be set at that position.
Setting the Tool Height Offsets:
Pressing F3 – Auto Measure and then CYCLE START at the prompt will cause the Z-axis to move down until
the tool touch-off is detected; the resulting tool length will be entered in the table (same as with F2 - Manual). The
Z-axis then returns to its home position.
If Parameter 17 has been set to the number of a valid return point (1 or 2), the F3 – Auto Measure option will
move the X and Y axes to that return point before moving Z down. Return point 1 is the G28 position from the
Work Coordinate System Configuration screen (see Chapter 4). Return point 2 is the G30 position on that screen.
If Parameter 17 is zero (0), the X and Y-axes will not move before Z moves down. In this case you must be careful
to jog the machine directly over the detector before pressing F3 – Auto Measure.
Note: SHIFT+F3 can be used to override any return point movement in cases where parameter 17 is set to use it.
This is helpful for measuring tools wherein the height measurement is not taken from the center point of the tool.
Batch Tool Height Offset Measurement Process:

If you have both purchased the Automatic Tool Measurement (TT1) option and also have an automatic tool changer
installed, then you can press F4 - Batch to measure multiple tools in one process. After pressing F4 - Batch, you
will be prompted with the following dialogue box:
After entering a list of tool numbers, you can press CYCLE START to perform the batch tool measurement
process. This process is similar to the single tool height offset measurement (accessed via F3 – Auto Measure) but
will do multiple tools in one shot.
Setting up Tool Height Offsets
WARNING: Before manually jogging any probe to a position, make sure the machine Feedrate is turned
down (less than 10 in/min) or damage to the probe may result!!!
Using a Probe as the Reference Tool

Before you set the Z Reference, make sure the probe Tool # is entered into Parameter 12 on the Machine
Parameters screen. Make sure that Parameter 17 on the Machine Parameters screen contains a 0. Follow these steps
to probe Z Reference:

1. Load the probe into the machine.
2. Jog the probe over the desired reference surface and press F1 – Z Ref.
3. Press F3 and then CYCLE START; the probe will find the Z Reference.
At this point, the Z Reference is now entered into the Offset Library and is the reference height for all other tools.
Remove the probe and measure any other tool offsets manually as described earlier in this chapter.
Measuring Each Tool Offset Using a Fixed Detector

Before measuring any tool height, make sure you enter the probe or reference tool-measuring location. Do this by
entering a reference point number (1 or 2) into Parameter 17 and entering the detector position as the corresponding
Reference Return Point on the WCS Configuration screen. Otherwise, the machine may traverse to a location that
could damage the probe or reference tool. Also remember that if Parameter 17 is zero (0), the X and Y-axes will
not move before Z moves down. Also be sure that parameter 44 is set correctly. This is the input number for the
TT1. Now that a permanent location has been set, do the following:
Load reference tool (preferably the longest tool) and highlight its corresponding Height Offset # using the up or
down arrow keys.
Press F1 – Z Ref, then F3 – Auto Measure and then CYCLE START to set the Z reference using this tool. The X
and Y-axes will traverse to the preset location, then Z will move down until the tool is detected and the Z reference
will be set.
Load the next tool.
Highlight the desired Height Offset # on screen using the up or down arrow keys.
Press F3 – Auto Measure and then CYCLE START. The X and Y-axes will traverse to the preset location, then
Z will move down until the tool is detected. Once the detector is triggered, the tool offset will show on the screen.
A negative offset means the tool is shorter than the reference tool.
Once all of the tool offsets have been measured, press F10 - Save to save them. Otherwise, press ESC to cancel any
changes.
Tool Library
The definitions in the Tool Library associate tool (T) numbers with height offset (H) and diameter (D) numbers, the
default coolant type, spindle direction, and spindle speed for the tool, and a text description of the tool. This
information is used by the Intercon-programming package (described in Chapter 10) to provide defaults whenever a
tool change is selected. For enhanced ATC features, the (T) numbers are also associated with bin numbers. See
Chapter 14 for more information about enhanced ATC features (parameter 160).

Note: If enhanced ATC features are not on, the cursor cannot be moved into the bin column and the message “Bin
fields are locked.” will appear where the tool in spindle display is located. In addition, the F1 – Clear Bin, F2 – Clear
All, and F3 - Init keys only appear if enhanced ATC features are on.
You can inspect and change any of the 200 tool definitions. To edit a Tool Library definition move to the desired
tool number with the arrow keys, Page Up, Page Down, HOME, and END. To change Height Offset numbers,
Diameter numbers, default spindle speed values and the tool description, type a new value into the field and then
press ENTER. To change the default spindle direction and coolant type press SPACE to cycle through the
possible values. When the changes are complete press F10 - Save to save the Tool Library and exit.
Bin
This field specifies which bin location, or ATC carousel position, that the tool is occupying. Valid values are –1
(shown as dashes “---“) through the maximum number of tools specified by machine parameter 161. A value of 0
indicates that the tool is in the spindle. The F1-F3 keys will work when the cursor is in the Bin column.
F1 - Clear Bin – places dashes “---“ into the bin field (same as entering –1).
F2 - Clear All – places dashes into every bin field.
F3 - Init – sets T1 to Bin 1, T2 to Bin 2, T3 to Bin3, and so on, all the way up to the maximum number of
tools specified in machine parameter 161.
Note: For enhanced ATC applications, the bin numbers will be updated when tool changes are completed. For
random, or arm type tool changers, tools in the spindle are placed into the bin where the next tool is picked up, and
not necessarily from the bin which it was originally taken.
Height
This field specifies a default Height Offset (H) number to use with each tool. Possible values are 1 to 200.
Intercon uses this information to provide a default H value at each tool change. CNC10 also uses this information
to correct for the length of the tool that is used to establish the Z-axis position in Part Setup (see Chapter 5).
Diameter
This field specifies a default Diameter (D) number to use with each tool. Possible values are 1 to 200. Intercon
uses this information to provide a default D value at each tool change. To change the value type a new number and
press ENTER.
Coolant
This field specifies a default coolant type to use with each tool. Possible values are FLOOD, MIST, or OFF.
Intercon uses this information to automatically insert M7 or M8 after a tool change. To change the value, press
SPACE until the desired value is shown.
Spindle
This field specifies a default spindle direction to use with each tool. Possible values are CW, CCW, or OFF.
Intercon uses this information to automatically insert M3 or M4 after a tool change. To change the value, press
SPACE until the desired value is shown.
Speed
This field specifies a default spindle speed to use with each tool. Possible values are 0 to 500000. Intercon uses
this information to automatically insert an S code after a tool change. To change the value, type a new number and
press ENTER.
Description
This field contains a text description of the tool. The description will appear in a prompt message on the screen
when CNC10 reaches a tool change (M6).

Chapter 6
Running a Job
To run the current job, press the CYCLE START button on the jog panel. See Chapter 2 for a description of the
CYCLE START button. If your control is not equipped with a jog panel, press ALT-S on the keyboard. The
following menu is available, while the job is running.
Job running menu

The following keys are available while the job is running.
F1 – Feed (-1%)
Decrease feedrate override by 1%. This key only appears if jog panel is set to keyboard jogging.
F2 – Feed (+1%)
Increase feedrate override by 1%. This key only appears if jog panel is set to keyboard jogging.
F3 – Repeat On/Off
Toggle job repeat property.
F4 – Skips On/Off
Enable/Disable block skips.
F5 – Auto
Disable single block mode. This key only appears if Single Block Mode is turned on.
F6 – Stops off
Disable optional stops. This key only appears if Optional Stops is turned on.
F7 – Feed Hold
Turn feed hold on/off. This key only appears if jog panel is set to keyboard jogging.

F8 – Graph
Return to run-time graphics screen. This key only appears if the run-time graphics option is turned on.
F9 – Rapid On/Off
Turn rapid override on/off. The Rapid on/off key controls rapid override. If rapid override is on, the FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE knob applies to rapid (GO) moves and to jogging. If the rapid override is off, the FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE knob will have no effect on rapid moves and jogging.
F10 - Edit
Start the G-code editor. Press ALT Tab to switch between the editor and CNC10 as the job is running.
Canceling a Job in Progress

There are three conventional ways to cancel a currently running job (CNC program). When a job is canceled using
any of the following methods, the job's progress will be recorded. This allows the user to restart the job using the
Resume Job option or the Search and Run option.
CYCLE CANCEL
Pressing this key while a job is running will cause the control to abort the job currently being run. The control will
stop movement immediately, clear all M-functions, and return to the main screen. Hitting the escape key on the
keyboard is equivalent to hitting “CYCLE CANCEL.”
TOOL CHECK
Pressing this key while a job is running will cause the control to stop the normal program movement. In addition,
the Z-axis will be pulled to its home position and all M-functions will be cleared. The control will automatically go
to the resume job screen.
EMERGENCY STOP (E-Stop)

Pressing the EMERGENCY STOP key, while a job is running, will cause the control to abort the job currently
being run. The control will stop movement immediately, clear all M-functions, and return to the main screen.
Also, the power to all axes will be released.
Resuming a Canceled Job

If a job is canceled using one of the methods described above, it can be resumed in one of three ways.
CYCLE START
Pressing the CYCLE START button will restart the job at the BEGINNING of the part program.
Resume Job – F1 from the Run menu

Restart the canceled job at or near the point of interruption. See the next section in this chapter entitled “Run
menu” for more information.
Search – F2 from the Run menu

Restart at a specified point in the part program. See the next section in this chapter entitled “Run menu” for more
information.

Run menu
Press F4 - Run from the main screen to access the Run menu. From this menu, the operator can restart a canceled
job or change the way the job will run.
F1 - Resume Job
Access the resume job screen by pressing F4 - Run on the main screen to go to the run screen, and then pressing F1
– Resume Job in the run screen to go to the resume job screen. If the job was canceled by pressing TOOL
CHECK, the control will go to the resume job screen automatically. From this screen, the user can modify tool
offsets and the tool library, turn block mode on and off, turn optional stops on or off, graph the partially completed
job, or start the partially completed job.
The resume job option is not always available. The following situations will cause the resume job option to be
unavailable:
Loading a new job.
Running a job to completion.
Parse errors in the job.
Editing or reposting the job file.
Loss of power while a job is running.
F2 - Search
Invoking this option will bring you to the “Search and Run” menu. This menu will allow you to specify the
program line, block number, or tool number at which execution of a program is to begin. Program lines are
numbered from the top of the file down with the first line numbered 1. To enter a block number place an "N" in
front of the number. To enter a tool number place a "T" in front of the number. Pressing CYCLE START from
here would start the program at the point you specified.
An extra option unique to the “Search and Run” screen is the F1 – Tool Change “Do Last Tool Change” function.
This key toggles the tool change option as shown on screen. A "YES" tells the control to perform a tool change so
that the tool specified for the line or block has the tool indicated in the program. A "NO" uses the currently loaded
tool, regardless of what tool is specified for the line or block being searched.
NOTE: You cannot search into a subroutine.

F3 – Repeat On/Off
This key toggles the repeat feature for part counting. When part counting is in effect and Repeat is on, the job will
be automatically run again until the specified number of parts have been run. The On or Off label indicates the
state to which the repeat feature will toggle to when pressed. It does not indicate the current state. The current
state is indicated in the user window above.
The Part Count: prompt is used to set the Part count. Positive values set the part counter to count up and negative
values configure the part count to count down. For example, if 10 is entered in the Part Count prompt, the Part Cnt
in the status window changes to 10 and the Part # changes to 0 with an upward arrow indicator. When a job is run
and then completes, the Part # will increment to 1. If repeat is on, the job will automatically start again and keep
running until the Part # has reached the Part Cnt. If a –10 is entered in the Part Count prompt, the Part Cnt in the
status window changes to 10 and the Part # changes to 10 with a downward arrow indicator. When a job is
finnished, the Part # will decremented to 9. If repeat is on, the job will automatically start again and keep running
until the Part # has reached 0.
F4 - /Skips On/Off
This function toggles the block skip feature. When block skipping is on, G-code lines that start with a forward
slash character ‘/’ are skipped, i.e., they are not processed. The On or Off label indicates the state to which the
/Skips feature will toggle to when pressed. It does not indicate the current state. The current state is indicated in
the user window above.
F5 - Block Mode
Turns single block mode on and off. This is similar to pressing AUTO/BLOCK. If single block mode is on,
CNC10 will stop after each block in your part program and wait for you to press CYCLE START. The current
state is indicated in the user window above.
F6 - Optional Stops
Turns optional stops on and off. If optional stops are on, any M1 codes that appear in your program will cause a
wait for CYCLE START (just like M0). If optional stops are off, M1 codes will be ignored. The current state is
indicated in the user window above.
F8 - Graph
Graphs the part. For more information, see the "F8 - Graph" section in chapter 3. If this feature is invoked from
the Run and Search screen or the Resume Job screen, then the graphics will show exactly where the searched line or
block begins. Dotted lines indicate the portion of the part that is skipped. Solid lines indicate the portion of the part
that will be machined.
F9 – Rapid On/Off
This function key toggles Rapid Override. The On or Off label indicates the state to which the Rapid Override
feature will toggle to when pressed. It does not indicate the current state. It has the same effect as the Rapid Over
key discussed in Chapter 2.
F10 – RTG On/Off

This function key toggles the Run-Time Graphics option. If the option is turned on, Run-Time Graphics
automatically starts when the CYCLE START button is pressed. This option must be turned on for Run-Time
Graphics to be used. If the option is turned off, Run-Time Graphics cannot be started while a job is running.
The Power Feed screen is used to command axis movement. All the operations available on the Power Feed screen
may also be performed in MDI with the appropriate M and G codes.

Power Feed
Press F4 - Feed from the Setup menu to access the Power Feed screen. This screen is used to command axis
movement. All the operations available on the Power Feed screen may also be performed in MDI with the
appropriate M and G codes.
F1 - Absolute Power Feed

Press F1 - ABS to move an axis to an absolute position, at a specified feedrate.
F2 - Incremental Power Feed

Press F2 - INC to move an axis an incremental distance, at a specified feedrate.
F3 - Free XY
Press F3 - Free to release power to the X and Y motors, allowing you to use your machine manually for these two
axes.
F4 - Power XY
Press F4 - Power to apply power to the X and Y motors, allowing you to use your machine with the jog panel for
these two axes.

Chapter 7
The Utility Menu
To get to the Utility Menu, press F7 - Utility at the CNC10 Main Screen. The model will vary depending on your
M-Series Control model.
F1 - Format
Press F1 - Format to format a high-density floppy disk.
F2 - Update
To update your control software from a floppy disk or USB Storage device, put the update disk in the floppy disk
drive (or attach the USB storage device) and press F2 - Update. Choose the floppy drive or USB storage device as
location of the update. See “Using the Location Chooser”, below. The new software will then be automatically
loaded onto the hard drive. Once the new software is loaded, you may be required to power down the controller
before using the new software. Failure to do this may cause unpredictable errors.
F3 - Backup
Press F3 - Backup to enter the Backup Files screen. It is recommended that you back up the M-Series Control's
files on a regular basis. Also, you should label your diskettes clearly after backing up.
F2 - CNC
Press F2 - CNC and choose a location of where to export it to. A list of the CNC files that are stored on the
Controller (in the directory c:\cnc10\ncfiles) will be displayed. You can select the ones you want to backup with F1
- Toggle (or select all of them with F2 - All), and then accept them with F10 - Accept.
F3 - ICN
Pressing F3 - ICN will do the same function as above, except that this will back up the .ICN files that are stored on
the Controller (in the directory c:\intercon).

F4 - Restore
Press F4 - Restore to restore files that were previously saved with the Backup (F3 - Backup) option. When
restoring files be sure to have the proper back up disk.
F2 - CNC
Press F2 - CNC on this screen to restore CNC files from the location specified. This will restore to the
c:\cnc10\ncfiles directory.
F3 - ICN
Pressing F3 - ICN will restore *.icn files from the location specified. This will restore to the INTERCON
directory.
F5 - File Ops
Press F5 – File Ops to access an additional file options screen. These options operate on the CNC files stored on
the Controller's hard drive, floppy, flash memory, network and other locations. See “Using the Location Chooser”,
below. (The controller's CNC files are stored in the c:\cnc10\ncfiles directory.)
F1 - Import
Press F1 - Import to import CNC files to the Controller's hard drive from any source location. Make sure that the
files at the source are CNC files. You can select the ones you want to import with F1 - Toggle (or select all of
them with F2 - All), and then accept them with F10 - Accept. The selected files will then be copied from the
source location to the Controller's hard drive (c:\cnc10\ncfiles\).
F2 - Export
Press F2 - Export to export CNC files from the Controller's hard drive (c:\cnc10\ncfiles\) to any destination
location. You can select the ones you want to export with F1 - Toggle and then accept them with F10 - Accept.
The selected files will then be copied from the Controller's hard drive to the chosen destination.
F3 - View
Press F3 - View to view files at any location. You can select the one you want to view with F10 - Accept or
ENTER. The first 19 lines of the file will be displayed. When you are done viewing the file, press ESC.
F4 - Delete
Press F4 - Delete to delete files at any location. You can select the ones you want to delete with F1 - Toggle, and
then to delete them press F10 - Accept
F5 - Dig->CAD
Press F5 – Dig to CAD to list Digitize data files on the Controller's hard drive (see Chapter 8). You can select the
ones you want to translate to Mastercam's spline format with F1 - Toggle. Accept your selection with F10 -
Accept. The selected files will then be translated and placed in the CAD directory specified in pathm.ini. The
translated files will have an extension of. *.doc.
F6 - User Maint.
This menu provides user access to drag plot F1 - Drag and lash compensation F2 - Lash menus.
F7 - Report
Generates a backup of system configuration files called report.zip and copies it to the specified location. Your
dealer may then use the disk for servicing and troubleshooting purposes. To restore the configuration files from the
report disk, press F2 - Update from the Utility menu.

F8 - Options
Shows the software options that you have purchased or added to your control. This page will also display the PLC
programs, PIC type, and System ID # at the bottom of the screen.
F9 - Logs
Shows the messages and errors that have been logged by the control.
F1 - Errors
Displays the error/message log. Use PgUp, PgDn, Home & End to view. Esc to exit.
F2- Stats
Displays counts of errors logged. Use PgUp, PgDn, Home & End to view. Esc to exit.
F3 – Export
Exports the log to a floppy disk. Insert a floppy and press Enter
Using the Location Chooser
The location chooser lets you specify the location of files for file operations. The file locations may be on the
Controller's hard drive, floppy disk, USB storage devices, or any network location accessible to the controller.
When used with the Import option under File Options, the location chooser looks something like this:
The location chooser automatically fills in the location that you last chose for this operation. Press Enter to use the
same location again. To change it, type over it or press the down arrow to go to the list in the lower box. Press
Enter again to access the location
The list in the lower box starts with a list of all known drives and network locations. A history of recent choices
appears at the end of the list. To choose one of these locations, press the down arrow key until your choice is
highlighted. For example:

Press Enter to select the highlighted item and copy it to the upper box. You may now edit the item to add a
directory path. Press Enter to choose the location. The location chooser will verify that the path is valid. If it is
invalid, the “Invalid Path” message will be displayed. You will be unable to proceed with the operation until you
enter a valid path. If the path is valid, it will be copied to the history list.
Press Esc at any time to abort the operation.
Special Features of the Location List

If the cursor is in the lower location list, there are two special features available:
• Press Esc to return the cursor immediately to the upper box. This will leave the item in the upper box
unchanged. You will have to press Esc again to abandon the operation.
• Press Del to delete the highlighted item in the location history. You cannot delete the drive locations at the
top of the list. Del removes the history item only; it does not delete the location.

Chapter 8
Digitize
(F9 from Main Menu)
The Digitize feature of CNC10 is used to digitize a rectangular surface area (grid), an inside circular bore area
(radial), or a contour. The digitizing process creates a file with M & G codes that represent the digitized surface. If
the digitizing probe tip is chosen to match the milling cutter size, the digitized file can be loaded and run to produce
an exact copy of the digitized part.
To digitize rectangular surface areas, press F1 - Grid (see grid digitize section). To digitize the inside of a bore,
press F2 - Radial (see radial digitize section). To digitize the contour of a part, press F3 - Contr (see contour
digitize section). Press F4 - Probe to select from the Probing Cycles (See Chapter 9 of this manual).
When using a continuity touch probe, clean the metallic surfaces you are digitizing using glass beading or some
other suitable method. This allows for better contact and produces a more accurate digitizing.
Brushless motor note: If you experience excessive vibration on a brushless drive system, use Parameter 10 to select
smooth deceleration in digitizing probing moves. See Chapter 14 for more information.

Grid Digitize
(F1 from Digitize Screen)
Grid Digitize Run Setup

To set up a digitizing run, edit the parameters shown and then press CYCLE START. The control will move
through the area to be digitized in a rectangular pattern. At each X-Y point in the pattern, it will measure the Z
height of the sample surface, and record the coordinates in the data file.
Digitizing begins at the current tool position when the CYCLE START button is pressed. This position should be
in one corner of the digitize area, at a Z position higher than any point on the surface.
Grid Digitize Parameters

X Patch Length: The length of the area to be digitized, along the X-axis. A positive value will cause digitizing to
proceed in the X+ direction from the starting point; a negative value will cause digitizing to proceed in the X-
direction. If the value is 0, then digitizing will collect just one stripe along Y.
X Step Over: The distance to move between points on the X-axis. A smaller value should be used for a fine
digitize along the X-axis. A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along the X-axis. This distance should
be a positive incremental value.
Y Patch Width: The width of the area to be digitized, along the Y-axis. A positive value will cause digitizing to
proceed in the Y+ direction from the starting point; a negative value will cause digitizing to proceed in the Y-
direction. If the value is 0, then digitizing will collect just one stripe along X.
Y Step Over: The distance to move between points on the Y-axis. A smaller value should be used for a fine
digitize along the Y-axis. A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along the Y-axis. This distance should
be a positive incremental value.
Z Maximum Depth: The maximum distance the Z-axis moves below the starting height. If the probe does not
contact the surface at the maximum depth, that data point will be recorded as being at the maximum depth, and
digitizing will proceed with the next point.

Z Step Up: The distance the Z-axis moves up after making contact, before the control attempts to move X or Y. A
small value should be used when digitizing parts with gentle slopes; a larger value should be used when digitizing
parts with many steep walls.
Axis to Move First: The axis (either X or Y) which moves all the way across the digitize area with each pass.
Digitize File Name: The base name of the file in which the digitize data is stored. The file has an extension of .dig
for CNC replay.
Replay Feedrate: The feedrate to include with the G1 command on the first line of the data file. If the data file is
run as a CNC program, this is the feedrate at which the machine will retrace the digitized surface.
Multiple Patch: Indicates whether or not this digitizing is a continuation of an earlier digitizing. Choose NO if the
current digitizing is the first or only digitize run for the part to be digitized. Choose YES if the current digitizing is
not the first digitize run for the part. If Yes is selected, specify the name of a digitize file of a previous multiple
patch.
Replay Pattern: Indicates the replay movement pattern. If ZIG ZAG is selected, the replay pattern will alternate
between positive and negative directions on each successive pass. If ONE WAY is selected, the replay pattern will
maintain a constant "one-way" direction throughout the playback.
Probe Diameter: Indicates the probe tip diameter.

Grid Digitize Notes
1. A guide to the possible grid digitizing paths is as follows:
2. A digitizing patch can be located anywhere in the coordinate system. The digitizing starting point is referenced
from the part zero. For example, setting up digitizing, as shown in the figure on the right below, will record the
first point at (X5, Y5, Z1) and the last point at (X7, Y7, Z1). If the digitizing replay starting point is desired to be at
the part zero, be sure to set the part zero equal to the digitizing start point, as shown in the figure on the left below.
This orientation will record the first point at (X0, Y0, Z0) and the last point at (X2, Y2, Z1). For more information
on part setup see Chapter 4.

3. A good technique for calculating Z maximum depth is to touch off the lowest surface of the part to be digitized
and set the part zero's Z value to Z0. Then jog the probe tip to a point higher than the highest surface of the part to
be digitized. Note the displacement in the Z-axis. Again, set this Z height to Z0 and use the noted displacement for
the Z maximum depth.
4. Multiple patches are useful in the following situations: completing a canceled digitize run, digitizing parts with
large areas that contain nothing to be digitized (shown below), and patching vertical walls to eliminate scallops
caused by the cutting tool.
The drill shown in the previous example is L-shaped. Therefore, it can be digitized faster and more efficiently
using three rectangular patches than digitizing the complete area with a single patch.

Digitizing the entire part and then adding multiple small patches along the walls can avoid vertical wall scalloping.
If a vertical wall extending along the X axis needs to be cleared of scallops, just add a small patch running the
length of the wall. Set the “Axis to Move First” parameter to Y. This will clear the scallops.
Radial Digitize
(F2 from CNC10 Digitize Screen)
Setting up a Radial Digitize Run

To set up a digitize run, edit the parameters shown. Jog the probe tip to the starting height and to the center of the
bore to be digitized. Then press F1 - Center to define the center position for digitizing. This center position will
be used as the center of all radial digitizing runs until you leave the radial digitize menu or redefine the center. If
you are using a full angle, you can now press CYCLE START to begin digitizing. If you have specified partial
angle, press F2 - Partial to define the partial angle (see setting the partial angle section in this chapter). After
defining the partial angle, pressing CYCLE START will start the digitize run.
WARNING: The probe must be able to retreat to the center from any position on the digitize surface. If the
digitize surface contains features that do not allow for the probe to exit after entering, a probe crash may
occur! See radial digitize note 2 later in this section.
Radial Digitize Parameters

Containment Radius: The maximum distance from the center position to look for a digitize data point. This
parameter is used to contain the probe within a circle with this radius centered at the center position. If the probe
does not contact the surface before reaching the maximum radius, that data point will be recorded as being at the
maximum radius, and digitizing will proceed with the next point.
Z Patch Depth: The depth of the patch to be digitized, along the Z-axis. A positive value will cause digitizing to
proceed in the Z+ direction from the starting point; a negative value will cause digitizing to proceed in the Z-
direction.
Z Step: The distance to move between points on the Z-axis. A smaller value should be used for a fine digitize
along the Z-axis. A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along the Z-axis. This distance should be a
positive incremental value.

Outer Stepover: The distance to move between points on one contour. A smaller value should be used for a fine
digitize along any one contour. A larger value should be used for a rough digitize along any one contour. This
distance should be a positive incremental value.
Replay Pattern: Indicates the replay movement pattern. If Zigzag is selected, the replay pattern will alternate
between positive and negative angle directions (CW and CCW) on each successive contour. If CW or CCW is
selected, the replay pattern will maintain a constant angle direction throughout the playback.
Digitize File Name: The base name of the file in which the digitize data is stored. The file has an extension of .dig
for CNC replay.
Containment Angle: Indicates whether or not the digitizing is to follow a full circle or a partial sector. Choose Full
if 0 to 360 degrees is desired. Choose Partial if some other angles are needed. These partial angles can then be
changed later (see setting the Partial Digitizing Sector Setup section that follows).
Multiple Patch: Indicates whether or not this digitizing is a continuation of an earlier digitizing.
Choose No if the current digitizing is the first or only digitize run for the part to be digitized. Choose Yes if the
current digitizing is not the first digitize run for the part. If Yes is selected, specify the name of a digitize file of a
previous multiple patch.
Move Between Levels: This field is enabled only if Partial and CCW or CW option is selected. It indicates the
move between Z levels on replay of a partial sector radial digitize file. This move may now be done in three
different ways: Clearance, which goes to the clearance height as in previous versions, Center, which goes to the
digitizing center and then to the Z level of the next pass, and Direct, which goes directly to the starting point of the
next pass.
Clearance Height: This field is enabled only if Partial, CCW or CW replay pattern, and Clearance Move type
option is selected. This distance indicates the clearance height needed to move the cutter from the end of one
contour to the beginning of the next contour. This distance should be a positive value.

Radial Digitize Notes
1. A guide to possible radial digitizing paths is as follows:
2. When radial digitizing, make sure the probe can fully retract to the center position without obstructions.
Observe the two parts below. The cross section on the left has no obstructions that could keep the probe from full
retraction to the center position. The cross section on the right does not allow the digitizing to retract to the center
in Area A. This area will cause a probe crash; single patch digitizing of parts such as this should be avoided. Use
2 or more patches to digitize the part on the right (in this case, you could divide the part in half horizontally, and do
each half separately).

Partial Digitizing Sector Setup
If you set the Radial Digitize Containment Angle to “Partial” then you must set up the Digitizing Setup by pressing
F2 - Partial from CNC10 Radial Digitize Screen.
The partial sector can be setup one of two methods:
One method is by editing the start and end angles directly. The start angle is referenced from zero degrees and
defines the beginning of the digitizing sector. The end angle is referenced from zero degrees and defines the end of
the digitizing sector.
The second method involves jogging the probe tip and touching off the digitize surface. By moving the probe tip to
positions on the digitizing surface, one can set the angles. To set the start angle, jog the probe tip to the position on
the digitizing surface where the digitizing is to begin and press F1 - Start to define this as the start angle. * Notice
that the picture of the sector and the start angle's value change to reflect these settings. To define the end angle,
follow the procedure above but press F2 - End instead to set the end angle.
Regardless of the method used to define the start and end angles, pressing F10 - Save saves the angles and exits
back to the radial digitize menu. Pressing ESC will return to the radial digitize menu without making changes to
the start and end angles.

Contour Digitize
(F3 from CNC10 Digitize Screen)
Contour Digitize Run Setup

To set up a digitizing run, jog the probe tip to the center of the part and hit F1 - Center to assign that as your center
point.
Select CAM for a true CAM shape contour, or Wall for irregular shapes for wall following. Enter the rest of the
parameters for the part and digitizing job as shown below.
Jog the probe to a starting point and press CYCLE START. The control will move the probe toward the center line
in the +/- X direction until it comes into contact with the part. At each point of contact, the X and Y coordinates
will be recorded in the data file.
The probe will continue around the contour until it returns to the starting point to complete the cycle. Based on the
starting point, and the first point of contact, the digitize software will determine if the contour is internal or
external.

Contour Digitize Parameters
Copy Type: Toggle between CAM or Wall. Use CAM for precise replication of regular shapes and use Wall
following for contours with irregular shapes.
X Patch Length: The length of the contour to be digitized, along the X-axis.
Y Patch Width: The width of the contour to be digitized, along the Y-axis.
Axis Step Over: The distance to pull back away from the surface in the X and/or Y direction. A larger value
should be used for a rough digitize along the Y-axis. This distance should be a positive incremental value.
Digitize File Name: The base name of the file in which the digitize data is stored. The file has an extension of
.cam for CNC replay and is stored in the c:\cnc10\ncfiles directory.
Plunge Rate: The feedrate the Z axis plunges between successive depth passes.
Z Surface Height: Surface height of material for reproduction of digitized parts.
Z Clearance: Clearance to rapid to above surface of part during replay.
Z Depth: Depth of the part as measured from the surface height.
Z Depth Increment: Depth of cut for each Z step of the part.
Probe Diameter: Diameter of probe tip used to digitize the part.

Contour Digitize Notes
Contour digitizing creates an M&G code file with a .cam extension. The structure of the .cam file starts with a
header of comments indicating some of the parameters used when digitizing the contour. Next is the contour itself,
which is outputted as a subprogram. The M&G codes are preceded by an O9800 (start of subprogram) and
followed by an M99 (end of subprogram). The end of the .cam file contains the initial positioning moves and a call
to the contour subprogram (G65 P9800).
Probing direction: When starting the digitizing cycle, choose a starting point where the X travel will contact a point
on the cam on the Y axis. The probe tip will move toward the center line in the X direction until it contacts the
cam, then will move either clockwise or counterclockwise around the cam, depending on which quadrant you
started the cycle (see Table 1).
Table 1 – Probe direction by starting quadrant

X Y Probe travels X-; Y+ X+; Y+
- - CW
- + CCW
+ + CW
+ - CCW
- 0 CW
X-; Y- X+; Y-
+ 0 CCW
If the probe bypasses a contact point on the Y axis, it will continue moving in the X direction across the center line
until it reaches the patch length limit and faults out.
Canceling a job: Unlike grid or radial digitizing, if you cancel a contour before it is completed, you will not be able
to back plot to the point of interruption to continue the cycle. You will need to start over.
Before running a job: Before running a job created by contour digitizing, you will need to add some information to
the file to define any required tool change, cutter compensation and height offset commands.
1. Do a search in the G code for the phrase “Add Comp Here.”

2. Refer to the descriptions of G40, G41 and G42 in Chapter 12.
3. Add the proper G code to the file after the “Add Comp Here” prompt.
4. Save the file, and run your job.

Chapter 9
Probing
Attention!! Refer to the Probe Parameters section at the end of this chapter before using any probe.
Part Setup with Probing

Single axis, single surface probing is available on the Set Part 0/Position screen using the F4 - Auto key. This
allows you to probe various surfaces to define the part coordinate system. Multi-axis and multi-surface probing
cycles are available on a separate screen, accessible from Set Part 0/Position with the F5 - Probe key or from F4 -
Probe in the digitize screen. These allow you to locate the center points and corners of differently shaped parts.
Brushless motor note: If you experience excessive vibration on a brushless drive system, use Parameter 10 to select
smooth deceleration in probing moves. See Chapter 14 for more information.
WARNING: Before manually jogging any probe, make sure the machine Feedrate is slow (less than 10
in/min) or damage to the probe may result!
Automatically Setting Part 0

Part zero can be found using the probe. Make sure your probe height and diameter offsets are set for the tool
number you assigned to the probe and that parameter 12 is set to that tool number. The Edge Finder Diameter will
be set automatically.
To set part 0 using the probe:
1. Select the current work coordinate system by pressing F6 – Prev WCS or F7 – Next WCS. Then select the axis
you want to probe by pressing F1 – Next Axis.
2. Manually jog the probe about 1/2 inch away from the surface you wish to define. Make sure the approach
direction to the part is set properly. Probe the selected axis by pressing F4 - Auto. When the surface is found, the
control will assume this point to be the new axis 0.

3. If you want this probed surface to be something different than 0, enter the value by the using arrow keys to
highlight Part Position. Type in the value and press F10 - Set.
Repeat steps 1-3 to set the remaining axes using the probe. Any previously entered Edge Finder Diameter or Tool
Number value will be discarded.
Finding Center/Corner Points

To enter the Probing Cycles screen, press F5 - Probe from the Set Part 0/Position screen. You can locate the center
of a bore, boss, slot, or web. You can also find an inside corner, outside corner, or a single axis. The corner points
don’t even have to be right angles! The Edge Finder Diameter doesn’t need to be entered since these cycles place
the probe directly over the center or corner of the part.
Calibrating the Probe Tip Diameter

You can calibrate the probe tip diameter to compensate for pre-travel (the amount that the probe deflects before it
actually trips). Simply enter a probe tip diameter of zero, probe out a precision bore with a known diameter, and
enter the difference between the reported bore diameter and the found bore diameter as the actual probe tip
diameter.
Probing Cycles
You can enter the Probing Cycles screen from either the Set Part 0/Position screen (F5 - Probe) or the Digitize
menu (F4 - Probe). The Probing Cycles screen is shown below:
The probing cycles will report the location and dimensions, as applicable, of the probed feature in a floating dialog
box. The dimensions are adjusted to compensate for the probe tip diameter, entered in the Offset Library (see
Parameter 12). For your convenience, you can edit the probe diameter on this screen, as long as the Tool Number,
as set in Parameter 12, is not 0. During the probing cycles, the probe will move at speeds specified in Parameters
14 and 15. Refer to the Probe Parameters section later in this chapter for more information.

F1 – Bore
Press F1 - Bore to enter the Bore screen. A picture similar to the one shown at right will appear, with instructions.
Follow these steps:
1 - Make sure the probe is clear of any obstacles.

2 - Manually jog the probe inside the hole. The probe tip should be just below
the top edge of the surface.
3 - Press CYCLE START to start the probing.
At the end of probing, the probe will be positioned at the center of the bore,
and the X and Y positions will be shown on the screen.
Press ESC to return to the Set Part 0/Position screen or digitize screen.
F2 - Boss
Press F2 - Boss to enter the Boss screen. A picture similar to the following will appear, with instructions and two
input fields. Follow these steps:
1 - Press F1 - Orient to select the orientation of the probe with respect to the Boss. You will see one of the screens
shown below.
2 - Slowly jog the probe to the approximate orientation as shown in the
picture. Be sure to give enough space for the probe tip to clear any
obstacles during the jog.
3 - Enter the approximate Boss diameter.
4 - Highlight the Z clearance amount by pressing the down arrow key.
Enter approximate distance (in the Z direction) the probe must move
to lift up over the Boss.
5 - Press CYCLE START to start the probing cycle.
If the Z clearance you entered is too small, the probe will stop and show an error message. Correct the problem by
repeating the previous steps. If the approximate diameter you entered is too small, the probe will bounce by 10
percent of its diameter across the top surface until it either finds the correct edge, the additional distance searched is
equal to Parameter 16, or a travel limit is reached.
Once the probing cycle is complete, the probe will be positioned at the center of the boss at the Z clearance level
entered. Press ESC to return to the Set Part 0/ Position screen or digitize screen.

F3 - Slot
Press F3 - Slot to enter the Slot screen. A picture similar to the ones shown
will appear along with instructions:
1 - Press F1 - Orient to select the orientation of the probe with respect to the slot.
2 - Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position shown in the picture.
During this jog, make sure you have enough space between the probe
and the part.
3 - Press CYCLE START to begin probing.
Once the cycle is finished, the probe will

be located at the center of the slot. Press
ESC to return to the Set Part 0/ Position
Screen or digitize screen.
F4 - Web
Press F4 - Web to enter the Web screen. A picture similar to the following will appear,
with instructions and two input fields. Follow these steps:
1 - Press F1 - Orient to select the orientation of the probe. You will see one of the screens shown below.
2 - Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position shown in the picture.
During this jog, be sure to give enough space between the probe and the part.
3 - Enter the approximate Web width.
4 - Highlight the Z clearance value using the up or down arrow key. Enter
approximate distance the probe has to travel in order to lift up over the Web.
5 - Press CYCLE START to start the probing cycle. Once the probe has completed
its search, it will automatically position to the centerline of the web.
If the Z clearance you entered is too small, the probe will stop and show an error message. Correct the problem by
repeating the previous steps. If the approximate width you entered is too small, the probe will bounce by 10
percent of its width across the top surface until it either finds the correct edge, the additional distance searched is
equal to Parameter 16, or a travel limit is reached.
Once the probing cycle is complete, the probe will be positioned at the center of the web, at the Z clearance level
entered. Press ESC to return to the Set Part 0/ Position screen or digitize screen.

F5 - In Corner (Inside Corner)
Press F5 - In Corner to enter the Inside Corner screen. One of the pictures will appear with instructions. This cycle
is similar to that of a slot cycle, the main difference is that you need to enter a clearance amount.
1 - Press F1 Orient and the screen will cycle through one of the probe
orientations shown here.
2 - Enter the clearance Amount. This is an approximate distance
(in the Z direction) the probe must move to clear the corner
3 - If the corner is rounded, jog the probe far enough away for it to miss the
curved area during the probing cycle (at least twice the corner radius).
At the end of the probing cycle, the probe will be positioned above the corner at the Z clearance level entered. Press
ESC to return to the Set Part 0/ Position screen or digitize screen.
F6 - Out Corner (Outside Corner)

Press F6 – Out Corner to enter the Outside Corner screen. A picture similar to the following will appear, with
instructions and two input fields.
Follow these steps:

1 - Press F1 - Orient to select the orientation of the probe with respect to the Corner.
You will see one of the pictures shown.
2 - Press F2 - Side to select which side of the corner the probe will be positioned
near. You will see the screen change.
3 - Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position as shown in the picture.
Be sure to give enough probe clearance.
4 - Select the Z clearance field using the arrow keys. Enter the approximate
distance the probe has to travel in order to lift up over the corner.
5 - Select the Distance to Corner amount using the up or down arrow keys. Enter
the approximate distance from the corner the probe is along the X or Y axis.
Once the probe has completed its search, it will be positioned above the corner at the Z clearance you specified.
Press ESC to return to the Set Part 0/ Position screen or digitize screen.

F7 - 1 Axis (Single Axis)
Press F7 - 1 Axis to enter the Single Axis screen. Follow these steps:
1 - Press F1 - Orient to select the orientation of the probe. You will see one of the
screens shown below.
2 - Slowly jog the probe to the approximate position as shown in the picture.
Be sure to give enough probe clearance.
Once the probing cycle is complete, the probe will move away from the surface by the amount entered in Parameter
13 (Recovery Distance). The dimension where it found the surface will be shown on the control. Press ESC to
return to the Set Part 0/ Position screen or digitize screen.
Probe Parameters
Various probing parameters can be set on the Machine Parameters screen (see Chapter 14). Make sure you enter
these parameters before you begin using the probe. If these parameters are not entered properly, damage to the
probe may result.
PLC Input Number and Contact State (Parameter 11) - A single value, +/-1 through 240. A positive number
indicates Closed on contact; a negative number indicates Open on contact.
Touch Probe Tool Number (Parameter 12) - A single value, 0 through 200, used to look up the length offset and
tip diameter of the probe in the Offset Library.
Recovery Distance (Parameter 13) – The additional distance the probe moves off of a surface after contact is
broken, before attempting to traverse parallel to the surface.
Fast Probing Rate (Parameter 14) - Used for positioning moves and initial surface detection, this parameter is
determined by machine response and permitted probe deflection as well as desired tolerance. The default setting is
25 inches/min.
Slow Probing Rate (Parameter 15) - Used for final measuring moves, this parameter is determined by a
speed/accuracy tradeoff. The default setting is 3.5 inches/min.
Maximum Probing Distance (Parameter 16) - The maximum distance that a probing cycle "searches" for a
surface in a given direction if no travel limits have been entered. The default is 10 inches. A larger value should be
entered for the hole and slot cycles if you are measuring very large features.
Detector Location Return Point (Parameter 17) - A non-zero value specifies the number of the reference return
point (entered into the WCS Configuration) directly above a permanently mounted tool detector. There are two
separate return points available; enter 1 or 2. A Zero (0) indicates that the tool detector is not permanently
mounted; automatic tool measurement will be performed without XY movement.

Chapter 10
Intercon Software
Introduction
Centroid's Intercon Conversational Software allows you to quickly create a part program right at the control without
having to be a G-code expert. Intercon will prompt you to enter values from your print that describes the geometry of
the part. Intercon will display graphics of the part as you are creating it, helping you quickly proceed through part
programming.
Intercon generates a G-code program from the geometric information you have entered. This is an advantage in several
ways:
The G-code program generated by Intercon can be edited using the built-in Centroid G-code editor (F6 - Edit from the
main screen). Intercon programs can be interrupted and restarted even in the middle of a canned cycle.
You can purchase an offline version of the Intercon software for use on your desktop PC. You will need to purchase a
hardware key, which will allow the offline version to run. Simply plug the key into the computer, install the required
drivers, and run it.
Intercon Main Screen
When you access Intercon through the F5 - CAM option in the CNC10 Main screen, the part program will be
displayed if the current job loaded in CNC10 had an associated Intercon program. If the job file in CNC10 did not have
an associated Intercon program, the F1 - File menu will be displayed to load or create a file.
When the part program is displayed, different operations can be navigated and highlighted for additional actions by
using the arrow keys, and the HOME, END, PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.
F1 - File
Choosing F1 - File will display the screen below. Intercon stores part designs in files identified with the extension
.ICN. For example, if you specify the name of a given part design as E_Z_CAM, this part design will be saved on
disk in a file called E_Z_CAM.ICN. The ICN files are only readable by Intercon.

File Menu
F1 - New
Choosing F1 - New will display the “New file:” prompt above the function keys. The name of the new program can
be typed, followed by the F10 - Accept or ENTER key to accept the new name. After accepting the new name, the
program header information can be entered. You can enter who the programmer is, a program description, the units of
measure and the date.
F2 - Load
When you press F2 - Load, the screen below is displayed.
The program to be loaded is highlighted. The arrow keys can be used to move the cursor around and highlight the file
to be loaded. The HOME, END, PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys can be used to navigate the list of files. Names
that are bracketed, for example [..], are the names of directories in the current directory, which is displayed at the top
of the screen.

It is also possible to start typing the name of the program to be loaded. When typing has started, the characters appear
in the “File to load:” prompt above the function keys. Different drives and directories can be accessed by typing in the
path at the “File to load:” prompt, or by pressing F10 or ENTER on a bracketed directory name.
The F1 - Floppy key will change to the “a:” drive and the F2 - Hard Drive option with change the directory to
c:\intercon.
Choosing F8 - Graph will graph the highlighted Intercon file.
The F9 - Details On/Off changes the format of the display such that each file or directory is on a separate line and
there are columns displayed for Programmer, Description, and Date Modified, i.e., the information that is contained in
the program header operation.
When loading a new file, a prompt will be displayed asking whether to save the existing file if there was one.
F3 - Save
Press F3 - Save to save the current part program. The current program will be saved under the specified name.
F4 - Save As
Press F4 – Save As to save the current program with a different name. Type the new name into the “Save part as:”
prompt that appears above the function keys. If the new name already exists, a prompt will be displayed as a warning
and will give the option to overwrite the existing file or return to enter a different name.
F5 - Delete
Press F5 - Delete to delete a file. After F5 - Delete is pressed, the screen will appear as in the F2 - Load option where
you can be navigate the files. A yes/no prompt will appear after accepting a file for deletion for final confirmation.
F9 - Details on/off
The F9 - Details On/Off changes the format of the display such that each file or directory is on a separate line and
there are columns displayed for Programmer, Description, and Date Modified, i.e., the information that is contained in
the program header operation.
F2 - Modify
Choosing F2 - Modify from the Intercon main menu will allow the currently highlighted operation to be modified.
When an operation is modified, the fields for that operation are displayed on the right hand side. When modifying an
operation, the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys can be used to move up and down through the Intercon operations
listed on the left hand side of the screen.
F5 - Help
Displays a picture to help define operations. Can be turned on and off by pressing the F5 – Help key.
F6 - Math Help
Provides a math assistance to solve trigonometric problems common in part drawings. For more information see the
Math Help section later in this chapter.
F8 - Graph
Choosing F8 - Graph will graph the current program. The graph is the same as what would be produced if the current
program were translated into G-codes and graphed from CNC10 software. See Chapter 3 for more information about
the Graph menu.

F9 - Teach Mode
The X, Y and Z keys will fill in a field with the current position for the related axis. This feature works when editing
most fields in an operation. Press F9 – Teach Mode when editing an operation to display a DRO.
F3 - Insert
Choosing F3 - Insert will insert a new operation before the operation that is currently highlighted, unless the
highlighted operation is the first operation in which case the inserted operation will be inserted as the second operation.
For more information on the operations see Insert Operations later in this chapter.
F4 - Cut
Choosing F4 - Cut will cut (remove) the highlighted operation from the program. The operation that is cut is placed
onto the clipboard stack.
F5 - Paste
Choosing F5 - will paste the last operation that was cut or copied into the clipboard stack into the current program line
that is before the highlighted operation. The number of operations that are currently in the clipboard stack are
indicated by the number in the Paste key. As long as you stay in Intercon, the clipboard stack will remain intact. You
may cut and copy operations from one program and paste them into a different program.
F6 - Copy
Choosing F6 - Copy will copy the highlighted operation into the clipboard stack and advance the cursor to the next
operation.
F7 – Copy Menus…
Choosing F7 - Copy Menus… will display these options:
F1 - Copy Menu
Allows a range of operations to be copied. Specify the Start Block, End Block, and Destination in the prompts that
appear in the Copy Menu. The range of operations is copied into a location that precedes the destination block.
F2 - Move Menu
Allows a range of operations to be moved. Specify the Start Block, End Block, and Destination in the prompts that
appear in the Move Menu. The range of operations is moved into a location that precedes the destination block.
F4 – Cut
Choosing F4 - Cut will cut (remove) the highlighted operation from the program. The operation that is cut is placed
onto the clipboard stack.
F5 – Paste
Choosing F5 - will paste the last operation that was cut or copied into the clipboard stack into the current program line
that is before the highlighted operation. The number of operations that are currently in the clipboard stack are
indicated by the number in the Paste key. As long as you stay in Intercon, the clipboard stack will remain intact. You
may cut and copy operations from one program and paste them into a different program.
F6 – Copy
Choosing F6 - Copy will copy the highlighted operation into the clipboard stack and advance the cursor to the next
operation.
F9 - Clear Clipbrd
Removes all operations in the clipboard stack.

F8 – Graph
Choosing F8 - Graph will graph the current program. The graph is the same as what would be produced if the current
program were translated into G-codes and graphed from CNC10 software. See Chapter 3 for more information about
the Graph menu.
F9 - Setup
Choosing F9 - Setup will display the Setup menu where certain options can be set. The Setup menu appears as below.
Use the up and down arrow keys to move. Clearance Amount, Spindle/Coolant Delay, and Corner Feedrate Override
require a value to be typed in. The other fields have fixed values that may be toggled by using the F1 - Toggle key.
Comment Generation: When this field is set to Enabled, Intercon will put a comment describing the operation type
before each block. Disabling Comment Generation will make the CNC files generated by Intercon smaller.
Clearance Amount: This is the distance that Intercon raises the Z-axis above the programmed surface height in
pockets, facing and frame mills when traveling across the work piece.
Spindle/Coolant Delay: Set this delay to the time in seconds you want Intercon to wait for the spindle to get up to
speed and the coolant to begin flowing.
Corner Feedrate Override: This is the percent feedrate that will be used in the corners of rectangular pockets and inside
frame mills. The default value is 50%.
Modal Operations: These options specify whether to automatically insert the same operation after the first has been
accepted. Once modal insert mode has begun, press ESC to insert a different operation.
Rotary 4th Axis: This option specifies whether 4th axis movement fields appear in Linear and Rapid moves and
whether or not the Intercon program will post 4th axis information. This option affects the value in parameter 94.
DRO Units: Specifies the Units used for the DRO. It affects the corresponding field in the Control Configuration.
Machine Units: Specifies the Units used for machining. It affects the corresponding field in the Control Configuration
of CNC10. The posted G-code will contain a G20 for Inches mode and a G21 for Metric mode.

Help Icons always on: Toggle between yes or no. Selecting “yes” means that help information will always be
displayed when editing operations. “No” means that you will have to press a key to get help. Whether set to “yes” or
“no”, the help screens can always be toggled on or off by pressing the F5 - Help key when editing an operation.
F10 - Post
Choosing F10 - Post will post the current program. Posting is the process of converting the operations into G-codes.
When the posting process is completed, Intercon is exited. The Intercon program is also saved as part of the posting.
Insert Operation
When you press F3 - Insert, or when you choose New Part from the Main Screen, you will see the Insert screen:
The new operation will be inserted right before the currently highlighted one. The operation types that you can insert
are listed across the bottom of the screen.
F1 - Rapid Traverse
Press F1 - Rapid from the Insert Operation screen to insert a Rapid Traverse. You may see the following screen:

End: When you first access the rapid traverse screen, the cursor will be highlighting the first field, End X. This is the
X coordinate of where the cutter will be after the rapid traverse has been completed. Similarly, Y and Z represent the
coordinates of the cutter after the rapid traverse is completed. The angle and length fields will be computed if you
choose to enter the end point of the move.
Angle: The destination may also be specified in terms of a counterclockwise angle from the three o'clock position.
When combined with a length for the current move, the corresponding X and Y coordinates for the destination will be
calculated and placed in the correct fields. The Z destination will remain unchanged, however.
Length: The length of the rapid traversal. When combined with the angle of the current move, the corresponding X
and Y coordinates for the destination will be calculated and placed in the correct fields. The Z destination will remain
unchanged, however.
The F1 – Abs/Inc key toggles between incremental and absolute positioning modes in any of the fields where a
positional dimension is needed. For example: X, Y, or Z-axis dimensions can all be in incremental or absolute
coordinates, or a mixture of both. The length and angle fields cannot be incremental. These fields are absolute values.
The F2 - Z Home key may be used on the Z destination field to tie the ending Z coordinate to the Z home position.
This means that no matter what your Z home value is at the time that you run your program, the final Z position will be
the Z home position.
When you are finished entering all of the dimensions for the rapid move, press F10 - Accept to accept the operation
and return to the Insert Operation screen.
NOTE: When making rapid moves, if a Z destination higher than the current cutter position is specified, the
cutter will first be raised to the destination Z position, and then move linearly in X and Y to arrive at the
destination. If a Z destination lower than the current cutter position is specified, the cutter will move linearly in
X and Y first and then plunge Z to the destination Z position.
NOTE: The Rapid traverse operation can have rotary fields, if you have a rotary fourth axis. The rotary field
descriptions are the same as that of the Linear Mill operation.
F2 - Linear Mill
If you press F2 - Linear from the Insert Operation screen, a screen similar to the following appears:

The numbers in the different fields on the screen correspond to the following Linear Mill example shown here
graphically:
End: When you first access the linear mill screen, the cursor will be highlighting the first field, End X. This is the X
coordinate of where the cutter will be after the linear move has been completed. Similarly, Y and Z represent the
coordinates of the cutter after the linear move is completed. The angle and length fields will be computed if you
choose to enter the end point of the move.
Angle: The destination may also be specified in terms of a counterclockwise angle from the three o'clock position.
When combined with a length for the current move, the corresponding X and Y coordinates for the destination will be
calculated and placed in the correct fields. The Z destination will remain unchanged, however.
Length: The length of the linear mill. When combined with the angle of the current move, the corresponding X and Y
coordinates for the destination will be calculated and placed in the correct fields. The Z destination will remain
unchanged, however.
Connect Radius: If you are performing two linear mill operations and you wish to have a rounded 'corner' between
them instead of a sharp peak, you may enter the radius of the 'corner' and Intercon will insert an arc between the linear
mill operations. This connect radius also works for blending a line into an arc operation.
Feedrate: Speed at which the cutter moves.

The feedrate can be toggled to modal, fixed, or slave. This is indicated by the symbol beside the feedrate field. If the
feedrate is modal then it will have the “M” symbol or if it is fixed it will have the “F” symbol shown below. The slave
feedrate has no symbol and is set to the last modal feedrate set in the program, when the modal feedrate changes all the
following slave feedrates change until the next modal feedrate is encountered.
If you have a fourth axis installed and it is rotary, additional fields are shown for Linear Mill operations after the
feedrate field.
Degrees: The number of degrees you want to move the rotary axis. This value can be positive or negative and the
movement of the rotary axis will depend on the orientation of the axis.
Minutes: The number of minutes you want to move the rotary axis. Values for this field are between 0 and 59.
Seconds: The number of seconds you want to move the rotary axis. Values for this field are between 0 and 59.
Decimal degrees: This is another method of entering the number of degrees. If you choose to enter the movement of
the rotary axis with the fields listed above, the value of this field will be calculated automatically. If you choose to
enter the number of degrees with this field or make changes to it, then the degrees, minutes and seconds will be
calculated or changed automatically. Values for this field can be positive or negative.
Rotary movement defaults to zero degrees, incremental. To enter an absolute (rather than incremental) rotary position,
you must press F1 - Abs/Inc to toggle to absolute.

F3 - Arc Mill
If you press F3 - Arc for Arc Mill from the Insert Operation screen, you will see the following screen:
The numbers in the different fields on the screen correspond to the following Arc Mill example shown here
graphically:
Operation Type: There are four ways to specify your ARC: using an endpoint and a radius (EP&R), using a center
point and an angle (CP&A), using a center point and an end point (CP&EP), or using a mid-point and an end point (3-
Point). The Three Point arc is designed to be used in conjunction with Teach Mode. When specifying a particular
kind of arc, you will not be able to modify certain fields. For example, if you are specifying an endpoint and a radius,
you will not be able to modify the mid point, center point and angle fields. This is because Intercon calculates the
correct values for these fields.
Mid: The X, Y, and Z coordinates of a point on the arc path somewhere between the start point and end point of the
arc. You will be able to modify this field only when specifying a Three Point arc. Also, the coordinate that does not lie
in the plane of the arc cannot be edited; it is automatically calculated.
End: The X, Y and Z coordinates of where the cutter will be once the arc move is complete. You will not be able to
edit this field if you are specifying a center point and angle (CP&A) arc.
Center: This is the X, Y and Z position of the center of the arc. You will not be able to edit this field if you are
specifying an end point and radius (EP&R) arc or a Three Point arc. Also, the coordinate that does not lie in the plane
of the arc cannot be edited; it is automatically carried forward from the last operation.

Angle: Number of degrees through which the cutter will travel. This value must lie between 0 and 360 degrees. You
will be able to edit this field only if you are specifying a center point and angle (CP&A) arc.
Radius: Distance from the center of the arc to its edge. This value must be greater than 0. You will only be able to
edit this value if you are specifying an end point and radius (EP&R) arc.
Plane: This determines whether the arc is to be milled in the XY-, ZX- or YZ-plane. If any of the Z coordinate values
are tied to the Z home position, only XY-plane arcs may be selected.
Direction: Determines whether the arc moves clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW). Note that the direction of
XZ arcs is judged looking Y+ (i.e. from the front of the machine). This is natural, but it is opposite of the way arcs are
specified in G codes. Intercon automatically makes this translation when it generates CNC codes.
Connect Radius: This field works like the Linear Mill connect radius. It allows for the blending of an arc into the next
line or arc operation.
Feedrate: Speed at which the cutter moves.

The feedrate can be toggled to modal, fixed or slave, this is indicated by the symbol beside the feedrate field. If the
Angle <= 180º: For end point and radius (EP&R) arcs, this field determines whether the arc is to be less than (YES) or
greater than (NO) 180 degrees.
F4 - Tool Functions
When you select the tool functions by pressing F4 - Tool the following screen appears:
The following parameters for this tool change is as follows:
Tool Number: Number of the tool (between 1 and 200) to use. Entering this value pulls the current settings for this
tool from the CNC10 tool library. You may then edit the length offset, diameter offset and diameter values if you wish
to redefine your tool. The length value is not editable.
Description: Description of the tool selected above, from the tool library.
Position: X and Y coordinates for the place at which the tool change will occur. This should be a place at which the
current tool can be removed from the quill and the new tool can be inserted.
Tool H Offset: Index in the offset library (between 0 and 200) of the actual tool height offset.
Tool Height: Tool height associated with the H offset selected above. This field is not editable.
Tool D Offset: Index in the offset library (between 0 and 200) of the actual tool diameter.
Tool Diameter: Tool diameter associated with the D offset selected above.
Spindle Speed: Speed at which the spindle will rotate when the spindle is started after the tool change.
Spindle Direction: Direction in which the spindle will turn after the tool change. If this is set to CW or CCW, the
spindle will be started automatically after the tool change. Press F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between CW, CCW,
and Off.
Coolant Type: Type of coolant to activate after the tool change. If this is set to Flood or Mist, the selected coolant
system will be started automatically after the tool change. Press F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between Flood,
Mist, and Off.
Actual Tool Change: Determines whether an M6 code is generated (answer Yes) during the tool change. If you do not
want to remove the current tool, but instead want to alter its diameter or length offsets (e.g. for doing a finish pass
while using cutter compensation, you may want to use a diameter offset which is slightly larger than the actual tool for
the first passes, then use the actual tool diameter for the finish pass), answer No to this question. Spindle and coolant
will not be automatically turned off if you answer No here.
Press F10 - Accept, Page Up, or Page Down when you are finished to accept these values and make changes to the
tool library. If you have changed any field other than the Tool Number of the Actual Tool Change field or position,
you will make changes to the CNC10 Tool Library. At the end of the program, Intercon always turns off the spindle
and coolant and returns the Z-axis to the home position. These codes do not need to be entered at the end of your
program.

F5 - Canned Cycles
When you choose the Canned Cycle operation by pressing F5 - Cycles, the following screen appears:
Canned Cycle Introduction #1: Using Pattern and Repeat (Drilling, boring, tapping)
Selecting F1 - Drill will give you four choices; F1 – Drill, F2 – Drill BHC, F3 – Drill Array, or F4 – Drill Repeat.
F2 - Bore and F3 - Tap will have the same menu selections as drill except they will display Bore or Tap cycles
All canned cycle operations using the Drill BHC (Bolt Hole Circle) or Drill Array are identical to their equivalent
using the F1 - Drill single hole selection. The use of the Drill BHC or Drill Array, however, offers the option to drill
more than one hole in a pattern dictated by the new fields in the menu. F4 - Drill Repeat allows the user to repeat a
set of single holes with a different type drilling, boring or tapping operation with out re-entering the X,Y coordinates.
The Bolt Hole Circle and array patterns are explained graphically in the following figure:
Canned Cycle Introduction #2: Linear Repetition Of Operations (Drilling, Boring, Tapping)
If you want to perform one operation several times in a linear pattern, simply define Position X, Y or both as
incremental values. To do this, use the F1 – Abs/Inc Key. This key will toggle the Position value mode between
incremental and absolute. If you define X and/or Y as incremental values, a new field will appear asking for the
number of holes:

The numbers in the fields on the screen correspond to the following example, shown here graphically:
Drilling (F1 in the Canned Cycle Menu: option #1)

If you press F1 - Drill from the Canned Cycle Menu, you will gain access to three types of drilling operations:
Drilling, Chip Breaking, and Deep Hole drilling. The current drilling operation in use is reflected in the field “Cycle
Type” and pressing F3 - Toggle or SPACE toggles between all three. In this section we will examine the first option:
Drilling.

Where:
Cycle Type: Selects one of three drilling operations: Drilling, Chip Breaking, or Deep Hole drilling. Press F3 -
Toggle or SPACE to toggle between the three choices.
Position: Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the drilling will take place. If either the X or Y coordinate is an
incremental value, you will have the option to drill multiple holes in a linear pattern (See Canned Cycle Introduction
#2).
Surface Height: Absolute Z-axis position from where each incremental depth is measured.
Clearance Height: This parameter specifies the Z-axis height used when performing rapid moves to the position of
each hole being drilled.
'Rapid To' Depth: The depth to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning to drill the hole at the specified Plunge
Rate. This is below the Clearance Height but above the Surface Height.
Depth: Total: Depth of hole (incremental) as measured from Surface Height.
Plunge Rate: Z-axis speed of descent during drilling.

The plunge rate can be toggled to modal, fixed or slave, this is indicated by the symbol beside the plunge rate field. If
the plunge rate is modal then it will have the “M” symbol or if it is fixed it will have the “F” symbol. The slave plunge
rate has no symbol and is set to the last modal plunge rate set in the program, when the modal plunge rate changes all
the following slave plunge rates change until the next modal plunge rate is encountered.
Dwell Time: Delay at bottom of hole before starting ascent.
Drilling provides a rapid to the hole position at the Clearance Height, followed by a rapid Z down to the 'Rapid To'
Depth. Next is a feedrate down to the specified depth. If a Spot facing cycle is desired, enter a value in the dwell time
field and the cutter will wait the desired amount of time before performing a rapid move up to the Clearance Height.
Chip Breaking (F1 in the Canned Cycle Menu: option #2)

If you press F1 - Drill from the Canned Cycle Menu you will gain access to three types of drilling operations:
Drilling, Chip Breaking, and Deep Hole drilling. The current drilling operation in use is reflected in the field Cycle
Type, and pressing F3 - Toggle or SPACE toggles between all three. In this section we will examine the second
option: Chip Breaking.

Where:
Cycle Type: Selects one of three drilling operations: Drilling, Chip Breaking, or Deep Hole drilling. Press F3 -
Toggle or SPACE to toggle between the three choices.
#2).

Depth: Increment: Depth of each individual peck.
Peck Clearance: Distance the tool retracts before drilling the next peck.

Deep Hole Drilling (F1 in the Canned Cycle Menu: option #3)
If you press F1 - Drill from the Canned Cycle Menu you will gain access to three types of drilling operations:
Drilling, Chip Breaking, and Deep Hole drilling. The current drilling operation in use is reflected in the field Cycle
Type, and pressing F3 - Toggle or SPACE toggles between all three. In this section we will examine the third option:
Deep Hole drilling.

Where:
Cycle Type: Selects one of three drilling operations: Drilling, Chip Breaking, or Deep Hole drilling. Press <F3> or
<SPACE> to toggle between the three choices.
#2).
Depth: Increment: Depth of each individual step of the drilling.
Rapid Clearance: Distance from the last incremental depth drilled that the tool rapid moves before starting the next
plunge.


Boring (F2 in the Canned Cycle Menu)
If you press F2 - Bore from the Canned Cycle Menu you will gain access to the boring operation:
Where:
Position: Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the boring will take place. If either the X or Y coordinate is an
incremental value, you will have the option to bore multiple holes in a linear pattern. (See Canned Cycle Introduction
#2)
Hole Depth: Depth of hole (incremental) as measured from Surface Height.

the plunge rate is modal then it will have the “M” symbol or if it is fixed it will have the “F” symbol . The slave
plunge rate has no symbol and is set to the last modal plunge rate set in the program, when the modal plunge rate
changes all the following slave plunge rates change until the next modal plunge rate is encountered.
Dwell Time: Delay at bottom of hole before starting ascent.
Tapping (F2 in the Canned Cycle Menu)

If you press F2 - Tap from the Canned Cycle Menu you will gain access to the tapping operations:

Where:
Tap Head Type: Without rigid tapping, this selects either Floating tap head or Reversing tap head. If rigid tapping is
enabled, you can select either rigid or reversing.
Spindle Direction: Shows the current spindle direction. The spindle direction should be CW for right-hand tapping,
and CCW for left-hand tapping. The spindle speed and direction appropriate for the tapping tool should be set in the
tool change in which the tapping tool was loaded. This field will be hidden if a reversing tap head is used.
* WARNING: The tap must be rotating in the correct direction before performing this operation.
Position: Specifies the X and Y coordinates where the tapping will take place. If either the X or Y coordinate is an
incremental value, you will have the option to tap multiple holes in a linear pattern. (See Canned Cycle Introduction
#2)
Depth Total: Depth of hole (incremental) as measured from Surface Height.
Depth Increment: (available only on rigid tapping.) This sets the length of each progressive "peck" down the hole.
Threads / Unit: Number of threads on each inch/mm of the tap. Used in conjunction with the Spindle Speed to
calculate the appropriate plunge rate (Plunge Rate = Spindle Speed / Threads per Unit).
Spindle Speed: Rate at which the spindle rotates. Used in conjunction with the Threads / Unit to calculate the plunge
rate.

* WARNING: The spindle speed must be set before performing this operation.
Dwell Time: Delay at bottom of hole before starting ascent. This is used for a floating tap to allow the spindle time to
reverse direction at the bottom of the hole. A default value of 0.1 seconds is suggested. This field will be hidden if a
reversing tap head is used; the tap head will reverse direction when the quill begins ascending.
* NOTE: When using low gear for tapping, the spindle may turn opposite the direction specified. The operator is
responsible for setting the correct spindle speed and direction.
Facing (F4 in the Canned Cycle Menu)

If you press F4 - Face at the Canned Cycle Selection Menu, the following screen is displayed:

The parameters in the previous screen correspond to the following dimensions:
Start: X and Y coordinates of the starting corner of the area to be faced.
Surface Height: Z coordinate of the top of the area to be faced.
Length: X-axis dimension of the area to be faced. If a negative value is entered for the length, the facing will occur in
the negative X-axis direction from the X-axis start position; otherwise, facing will occur in the positive X-axis
direction from the X-axis start position.
Width: Y-axis dimension of the area to be faced. If a negative value is entered for the width, the facing will occur in
the negative Y-axis direction from the Y-axis start position; otherwise, facing will occur in the positive Y-axis
direction from the Y-axis start position.
Depth: Incremental amount of material to be removed from Surface Height.
Step Increment: Distance that the cutter will step over in the Y direction for each pass.
Plunge Rate: Z-axis speed of descent during facing.

Feedrate: Speed of the cutter during facing.


Rectangular Pocket (F5 in the Canned Cycle Menu)
Pressing F5 - Rect. Pocket from the Canned Cycle Selection Menu displays the following screen:
The parameters on the screen correspond to the following dimensions:
Where:
Center: X and Y coordinates of the center of the Rectangular Pocket.
Surface Height: Z-axis position from which each incremental depth is measured.
Length: X-axis dimension of the rectangular pocket.
Width: Y-axis dimension of the rectangular pocket.
Corner Radius: Radius of curvature of the corners. It cannot be smaller than the current cutter radius.
Depth: Total: Total depth of the rectangular pocket.
Depth: Per Pass: Depth of each individual pass.
Depth: Plunge Rate: Z-axis speed of descent.

Depth: Plunge Type: Straight or Ramped. Straight plunge does a vertical Z plunge with no X, Y movement. Ramped
plunge does a zigzag plunge limited by the Plunge Angle entered below.
Depth: Plunge Angle: The maximum limit angle allowed for a ramped plunge. A special value of 0 means that there
is no limit angle. Note: This field means nothing if the Plunge Type is Straight.
Rough Cuts: Selects type of rough cut: conventional or climb. Use F3 – Toggle or SPACE to toggle between them.
Rough Cuts: Stepover: Amount of material removed by cutter during each pass around the pocket.
Rough Cuts: Feedrate: Speed at which cutter performs rough cuts.
Finish Pass: Selects type of finish pass: climb, conventional or none at all. Use F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle
between them.
Finish Pass: Amount: Amount of material to be removed on the finish pass.
Finish Pass: Feedrate: Speed at which cutter performs finish pass.

Circular Pocket (F6 in the Canned Cycle Menu)

When you press F6 - Circ. Pocket from the Canned Cycle Selection Menu, this screen is displayed:
The parameters on the screen correspond to the following dimensions:

Where:
Center: X and Y coordinates of the center of the circular Pocket.
Surface Height: Z-axis position from which each incremental depth is measured.
Diameter: Diameter of circular pocket.
Cleanout: If cleanout is Yes, then all the material in the pocket will be removed. If cleanout is No, then all the material
will not be removed. The cutter starts in the center of the pocket and arcing its way out and then going around the
frame.
Depth: Total: Total depth of the circular pocket.
Depth: Plunge Rate: Z-axis speed of descent.
Depth: Plunge Type: Straight or Ramped. Straight plunge does a vertical Z plunge with no X, Y movement. Ramped
plunge does a zigzag plunge limited by the Plunge Angle entered below.
Depth: Plunge Angle: The maximum limit angle allowed for a ramped plunge. A special value of 0 means that there
is no limit angle. Note: This field means nothing if the Plunge Type is Straight.
Rough Cuts: Selects type of rough cut: conventional or climb. Use F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between them.
Rough Cuts: Stepover: Amount of material removed by cutter during each pass around the pocket.
Rough Cuts: Feedrate: Speed at which cutter performs rough cuts.
Finish Pass: Selects type of finish pass: climb, conventional or none at all. Use F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle.
Finish Pass: Amount: Amount of material to be removed on the finish pass.
Finish Pass: Feedrate: Speed at which cutter performs finish pass.

Rectangular or Circular Frame Milling (F7 in the Canned Cycle Menu)
When you press F7 - Frame from the Canned Cycle Selection Menu, the following screen is displayed:
The parameters on the screen correspond to the following dimensions (rectangular frame):
Where:
Frame Type: Selects Inside Rectangle, Outside Rectangle, Inside Circle, and Outside Circle. Press F3 - Toggle or
SPACE to toggle between them.
Center: X and Y coordinates of the center of the frame mill.

Surface Height: Z-axis position from where each incremental depth is measured.
Length: X-axis dimension of the frame mill. (Rectangular frame only.)
Width: Y-axis dimension of the frame mill. (Rectangular frame only.)
Corner Radius: Radius of curvature of the corners. On an Inside frame, corner radius must be greater than the current
cutter radius. (Rectangular frame only.)
Diameter: Diameter of the frame mill. (Circular frame only.)
Depth: Total: Total depth of the frame mill.
Plunge Rate: Z-axis speed of descent.
Plunge Type: Straight or Ramped. Straight plunge does a vertical Z plunge with no X, Y movement. Ramped plunge
does a zigzag plunge limited by the Plunge Angle entered below.
Plunge Angle: The maximum limit angle allowed for a ramped plunge. A special value of 0 means that there is no
limit angle. Note: This field means nothing if the Plunge Type is Straight.
Entrance Type: Selects type of entrance: Arc On or Arc Off, use F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between them.
(Circular frame only.)
Cut type: Selects type of cut: conventional or climb, use F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between them.
Feedrate: Speed at which the cutter performs frame mill.
NOTE: To make a circular frame mill of radius R, specify R as the Corner Radius and set the Length and
Width parameters equal to 2 x R.
Thread Milling (F8 in the Canned Cycle Menu)

When you press F8 - Thread from the canned cycle menu, the following screen is displayed:

Multiple Thread Mill Single Thread Mill
The parameters on the screen correspond to the following:
Where:
Center: X and Y coordinates of the center of the thread mill operation.
Diameter: Major diameter of thread for internal thread milling and minor diameter for external thread milling.
Thread / Unit: Number of threads per inch or mm. Used to calculate thread pitch.
Thread Pitch: Thread pitch calculated from threads/unit field. This field cannot be modified.
Thread Type: Specifies right or left hand threads.
Thread Direction: Specifies whether to start at the bottom of the hole and work up or start at the top of the hole and
work down.
Tool Type: Single point or full form threading tool.
Thread Approach: Internal or external thread.
Clearance Amount: Used for external thread milling only. Specifies the diameter of the lead-in arc. Minimum
clearance is 0.050 inches.
Clearance Angle: Used for external thread milling only. Specifies the angle from which the lead in arc will start.
Feedrate: Cutting feed rate.
Surface Height: Absolute Z-axis position from position from where the incremental depth is measured.

Clearance Height: This parameter specifies the Z axis height used when performing rapid moves to the position of each
hole being thread.
'Rapid to' Depth: The depth to which the cutter rapid moves before beginning to thread mill at the specified Plunge
Depth: The total depth of the thread.
Number of Passes: Number of times the thread mill is to be done on the same hole.
Cleanout (F9 in the Canned Cycle Menu)

The cleanout cycle performs a horizontal zigzag pocket cleanout of a profile composed of lines and arcs.
When you press F9 - Cleanout from the canned cycle menu, the following screen is displayed:
Where:
Rough Cuts: Selects type of rough cut. Use F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between Conventional and Climb.
Type: Selects type of cleanout to use. The choices are Collapse, which cleans out the pocket from the outside
in, or Expand, which cleans out the pocket from the inside out. You can switch between the two by using the
F3 - Toggle or SPACE keys
Stepover: The distance between each step in the pocket cleanout. This value should be less than the tool
diameter to ensure all material is removed.
Feedrate: Speed at which cutter performs rough cuts.
Finish Pass: Selects type of finish pass. Use F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between them Conventional, Climb, or
None.
Amount: Amount of material to be removed on the finish pass.
Feedrate: Speed at which cutter performs finish pass.

Tool Number: Tool number to be used for the finish pass.
Surface Height: The Z-axis position from where the incremental depth is measured.
Clearance Height: This parameter specifies the Z-axis height to which the tool is retracted before moving to different
segments during a pocket cleanout.
'Rapid To' Depth: The depth to which rapid positioning moves will be made to when moving the Z axis downward.
Depth: Total: The total depth of the pocket measured as an incremental depth from the surface height.
per Pass: The depth amount of cut to be taken to reach the total depth. This value must be greater than 0.0 and
cannot exceed the total depth.
Plunge Rate: The feedrate at which the Z axis is moved when plunging to a lower depth.
After the cleanout parameters are accepted, the a screen similar to the following appears:
To complete the contour to be cleaned out, choose F2 - Linear or F3 - Arc to insert a linear move or an arc that
defines the pocket contour. The first segment should be a linear move to a point on the pocket contour; it cannot be an
arc. If the profile contour does not end at the start point, a linear segment is automatically inserted to close the
contour. The last line of the contour will not include a connecting radius to the starting point.
After the cleanout is defined you can press F1 - Island.

This will allow you to define the islands start point. After
the island has a start point you can use the F2 - Linear or
F3 - Arc keys to finish defining the island. Intercon will
automatically connect the last point you define in your
island to the start point.
At right is an example of a completed cleanout backplot.

F6 - Other
Choosing F6 - Other will display the following operations that may be inserted.
F1 - Comment - Enter a comment, up to 35 characters long, which will be displayed in the generated CNC program.
F2 - Spindle - Change the actual state of the spindle. Press F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between CW, CCW, and
OFF.
F3 - Coolant - Change the actual state of the coolant. Press F3 - Toggle or SPACE to toggle between FLOOD,
MIST, and OFF.
F4 - Clamp - Turn the Clamp ON and OFF. Press F3 - Toggle or SPACE to change the clamp state.
F5 - Z Home - Send the Z-axis to its home position.
F6 - M & G Code - Enter M & G codes into your Intercon part program. Great care must be taken when using this
function, as you could cause unpredictable results in the controller if you accidentally changed positioning modes in
your program, or perhaps turning the spindle off during a cut.
F7 - Rotary - Insert a rapid rotary move. This operation requires a rotary fourth axis. The fields are identical to the
fields in the Linear Mill operation as shown below, but the resulting move is a G0 (Rapid) moving only the rotary axis.
F8 - Import DXF - Insert Intercon operations created from objects in DXF files. For more information, refer to the
“Importing DXF files” section later in this chapter.
F7 - Cutter Compensation
Pressing F7 - Cutter Comp from the Insert Operation screen, will insert a cutter compensation command. Press F3 -
Toggle or SPACE to select cutter compensation Left, Right, or Off. Cutter compensation may be used with Linear
Mill, Frame Mill, and Rapid Traverse operations. For details on using cutter compensation, see Chapter 12 page 12-7
of the M-Series operator's manual.
The Rectangular Pocket, Circular Pocket, and Frame Mill canned cycles perform cutter compensation automatically.
If compensation left or right was selected before the canned cycle, it will be turned off.
F9 - Subprograms
Intercon subprograms allow you to make additional copies of a programmed contour. The copies may be repeated in
the x/y axes, depth repeat, rotated, or even a mirror image of the original. To create a subprogram, first define the
operations that will compose the contour. Any type of program operation (rapid, linear mill, arc mill, canned cycle,
subprogram, etc.) may be included in the contour. These operations must be programmed at the Z depth at which the
first pass will occur. When you are finished doing this, return to the Program Edit Menu. Move to the place in the
program where you want to repeat these operations and press the F3 - Insert key. The operations will be performed
once before the repeat operation occurs; therefore the operations to compose the contour should be defined at the place
in the program where they should occur first.

When you press F9 - Subpgm from the Insert Operation screen you will see the Insert Subprogram screen:
You may now select the type of subprogram desired. A typical subprogram screen appears as follows:
All subprogram operations contain the following fields:
Start Block: Selects the first operation in the block of operations to repeat. This operation must lie before the place in
your program where you are trying to repeat operations.
End Block: Selects the last operation in the block of operations to repeat. Again, this operation must lie prior to place
in your program where you are trying to repeat operations, but not precede the start block.

Clearance Height: This field determines the Z height at which the tool is moved over the workpiece before being
repositioned at the start of the contour. This value must meet or exceed the maximum Z height of all operations
contained within the contour. If any operation places the tool at the Z home position, then you must tie this value to
the home position (F2 - Z Home).
Plunge Rate: This is the speed at which the tool is repositioned on the Z-axis when moving to the beginning of the
first move of the contour. This has no effect on a plunge that you have programmed into the contour; however, this
has the effect of providing a vertical plunge for you in the event that you do not program your own plunge into the
contour.
Other fields specific to the various subprogram operations are described in the next few pages.
Repeat to Depth (F1 in the Insert Subprogram Menu)
The Repeat to Depth feature is useful for repeating a part contour when the material being machined is too thick to cut
in just one pass. The contour formed by these operations may either be a closed contour or an open one. If a non-
vertical plunge to the start of the contour is desired, it must be programmed into the contour (a vertical plunge between
passes will be provided if one is not programmed).
Total Depth: Indicates how deep the final depth pass is to be. This is a positive value. Note that because the contour
has been programmed at a depth of one depth increment below the workpiece surface, the final depth assumes that one
depth pass has already been performed, and, thus, subtracts one depth increment from the total depth.
Depth Increment: Specifies the distance to drop each time the contour is repeated. This is a positive value that may
not exceed the total depth of the operation.
When you have finished entering the required parameters, press F10 - Accept to accept them. An operation labeled
“Depth Rpt” will be inserted into your program in front of the highlighted operation. You may now edit this operation
just as you would edit any other operation (use the cursor keys to highlight the “Depth Rpt” operation, then press
ENTER.
* NOTE: If you wish to change the amount of the depth increment per pass after the contour has been programmed,
you must also change the Z depth of all the operations inside the contour to correspond to the new increment.

Linear Repeat (F2 in the Insert Subprogram Menu)
The Linear Repeat feature is useful for repeating a part contour multiple times along a straight line. The contour
formed by these operations may either be closed or open.
Increment: Specifies the X and Y distances between the start points of each copy of the contour.
Number of Copies: The number of times to repeat the contour.
Skip List: List of copies that are skipped. Enter the number or numbers of the copies that you wish to skip. In the
example below will skip copy # 2.
* NOTE: An array of repeats may be accomplished by doing a repeat of a repeat.
Mirror (F3 in the Insert Subprogram Menu)

The Mirror feature is useful for reflecting a part contour over a line. The contour formed by these operations may
either be closed or open.

Mirror Line: Specifies the type of mirror line to use. Choices are Horizontal, Vertical and Other (user-defined).
X Offset: Specifies the X coordinate on the Mirror Line. This field will not be visible for a horizontal mirror line.
Y Offset: Specifies the Y coordinate on the Mirror Line. This field will not be visible for a vertical mirror line.
Angle: Specifies the angle (from the three o'clock position) of the Mirror Line. This field will only be visible for a
user-defined mirror line and is used in conjunction with the X Offset and Y Offset fields to define the mirror line.
Rotate (F4 in the Insert Subprogram Menu)

The Rotate feature is useful for rotating a part contour multiple times around a given point. The contour formed by
these operations may either be closed or open.
Center: The XY location of the center of rotation.
Start Angle: The angle from the original copy at which the first copy will be placed. A positive angle indicates a
counterclockwise rotation, while a negative angle indicates a clockwise rotation.
Angle Increment: The angle at which each copy after the first will be placed from the first copy. A positive angle
indicates a counterclockwise, while a negative angle indicates a clockwise rotation. Must have a value larger than 1 in
the number of copies.
Number of Copies: The number of times to rotate the contour.
End Angle: The angle at which the final rotated copy will start, not the angle at which it will end. A positive angle
indicates a counterclockwise rotation, while a negative angle indicates a clockwise rotation.
Skip List: List of copies that are skipped. Enter the number or numbers of the copies that you wish to skip.
NOTE: The user may enter the Start Angle, the Number of Copies, and either the Angle Increment or the End Angle
value, and Intercon will compute the rest.
Graphics
Intercon features three-dimensional previews of the tool path to be followed when milling the part. You may choose to
display your project in one of two formats: a three-plane display, where the project is shown in each of the XY-, ZX-,
and YZ-planes; or an isometric display, which depicts the project three-dimensionally from an observer's point of
view. To view the graphics, press F8 - Graph from the Main Menu or from any Operation Edit screen.
The format of the display will be similar to the following:
The display will consist of arcs and/or lines that make up the tool path followed. Rapid (G0) moves will appear in
Red, linear (G1) and arc (G2, G3) moves will be Yellow, and compensated pass will appear in grey. Canned cycle
operations (except the facing cycle) will also display a gray.
F1 – 2D/3D
Pressing F1 - 2D/3D selects the format of the project display. This may take the form of the three-plane display (2D)
or the isometric display (3D).
Three-plane (2D) Isometric (3D)

F2 – View/Rotate
In three-plane (2D) view, F2 - View switches the point of view to a different plane. In isometric, (3D) view, F2 -
Rotate enables the arrow keys to rotate the figure. The arrow keys actually rotate a larger version of the YZX axes
figure that shows the orientation in which the part will be redrawn. Press F2 - Rotate to redraw without leaving
rotation mode. If you press Enter or F5 - Redrew after rotating the axes, the display of the axes will disappear. To
rotate to a different angle you will have to press F2 - Rotate again. Press Esc to cancel rotation.
F3 – Set Range
Press F3 – Set Range to specify the range of operations to draw. You will be prompted for a start block and an end
block.
F4 – Time Estimate
Press F4 - Time Estim to hide or display the time estimate in the upper left-hand portion of the screen.
F5 - Redraw
Pressing the F5 - Redraw key will cause the simulation to start again from the first operation (Redraw).
F6 - Pan
When using the pan feature, the project can be centered to the crosshairs in the display windows of the three-plane
display, or rotated around the center of the isometric display screen. To enter pan mode, simply press the F6 - Pan key
or press one of the arrow keys. A set of crosshairs will appear. Adjust the center of the crosshairs to the new desired
center. Press Enter, F5 – Redraw, F6 - Pan to redraw the part with the new screen center point.
F7, F8 & F9: Zoom In, Zoom Out & Zoom All
The project can also be viewed in an enlarged or reduced state by pressing the F7 - Zoom In or F8 - Zoom Out keys
to activate Zoom In and Zoom Out respectively. Pressing F9 - Zoom All redraws the project at its original size. Use
the arrow keys to select the new screen center before zooming in or out.
Number keys and Space bar – Feed Rate Override & Hold
If no jog panel is attached (or “Keyboard” has been selected as the jog panel type) the number keys 1 – 9 and 0 choose
feed rate overrides 10% - 90% and 100%, respectively. 1 is 10%, 9 is 90%, and 0 is 100 %. If there is a jog panel
attached you can use the feedrate knob to adjust the speed as well. The space bar toggles feed hold on and off.

Math Help
Intercon provides a math assistance function to solve the trigonometric problems common in part drawings. To enter
Math Help, press F6 - Math Help from any Edit Operation screen. The first time that you invoke Math Help, the
following screen appears which shows all available solvers:
The figures on the right are a graphical representation of the highlighted solver on the left. Pressing ENTER key will
display another menu that has various fields particular to the type of problem that is being solved. The graphic below
displays the Right Triangle Calculator menu. The options that are available on the function keys are the same for
every type of math help solver and perform the following operations:

F1 – Prev Soln (Previous Solution)
F2 – Next Soln (Next Solution)
The Prev Soln and Next Soln options will cycle backward and forward, respectively, through the available solution
sets for math solvers that may have multiple solutions. A status line near the bottom left of the screen appears once a
valid solution has been found. The solution status line indicates the total number of solutions and the solution number
that is currently represented by the graphic display on the right. For example, in an Arc Tangent Arcs math help, the
display solution status may be “- Solution 1 of 8 -“. In this case, the Prev Soln and Next Soln can be used to cycle
through all eight of the solutions.
F3 – Clear All
The Clear All option removes all solutions. It sets all fields for a particular solver to UNKNOWN.
F4 – Prev Solver
F5 – Next Solver
The Prev Solver and Next Solver options cycle backward and forward, respectively, through the various math help
solvers. These options are shortcuts which have the same effect as pressing ESC to reach the main math help menu,
navigating to the previous or next math help option, and then pressing ENTER.
F6 – Hide Math
The Hide Math option exits math help mode and returns to the operation edit menu. Pressing F6 - Math Help to
invoke Math Help again will restore Math Help exactly as you left it. After copying values from Math Help, you can
press F6 - Hide Math to hide Math Help, and then hit F10 - Accept to accept the values entered.
F7 – Copy <<<
F8 – Copy >>>
The Copy <<< option will move the value from the selected edit operation field into the selected math help menu field
and the Copy >>> operation will move the value from the selected math help menu field into the selected edit
operation field. For both options, the selected fields in the math help menu and the operation edit menu are advanced.
Only when the graphics display is off will the Copy operations actually copy values and advance field selections.
The currently selected fields have either a box drawn around them or are highlighted depending upon which menu is
active. The active menu, which is either the math operation menu on the left hand side or the operation edit menu on
the right hand side, depicts the selected field by highlighting the entire field. The non-active menu displays the active
field with a box drawn around it. Use the arrow keys to select fields as described below.
F9 – Graphic On/Off
The Graphic On/Off option will toggle the graphical representation of the math help menu on the display.
Ç È Å Æ (Arrow Keys) – Select Fields

The LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys are used to navigate between the math menu and the edit menu. The UP and
DOWN arrow keys are used to navigate within a menu. To choose fields for the “Copy” option, above, use the UP
and DOWN arrow keys to highlight the desired field in the menu and use the LEFT or RIGHT arrow keys to switch
menus.
Other features common to all Math Help operations

In some math help operations, there will be an asterisk ‘*’ character that appears immediately to the right of a field.
This character marks the field as a “given” field, which means that the value of this field will be held constant in the
process of solving the math equations.
F1 –Triangle:Right
F2 –Triangle:Other
The screen will show UNKNOWN if the value of each parameter is not known. Math Help waits for known values to
be entered, where:
Point a, b, or c is the coordinate value for each corner of the triangle.
Angle A, B, or C is the angle at each point of the triangle.
Length of values are the distances between the points indicated.
Continue adding all the known parameters. Select parameters using the arrow soft keys. When Math Help solves the
remaining unknown values, the screen will display them.

F3 – Tangent: Line Arc
Given the center (C1) the radius of an arc, and 1 point (LP) on a line, find the lines tangent to the arc (defined by the
tangent point (T1)).
You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the circle's center point, the circle's radius, and the X and Y coordinates
for a point on the line.
F4 – Tangent: Arc Arc
Given the center points (C1 and C2) and radii (R1 and R2) of two arcs, find the point (T) at which they are tangent.
You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the first circle's center point, the radius of the first circle, the X and Y
coordinates for the second circle's center point, and the second circle's radius.

F5 – Tangent: Line Arc Arc
Given the center points (C1 and C2) and radii (R1 and R2) of two arcs, find the lines (defined by T1 – T2) tangent to
both arcs.
F6 – Tangent: Arc Arc Arc
Given the center points (C1 and C2) and radii (R1 and R2) of two arcs and the radius of a third arc, find the center
point of the third arc and the tangent points (T1 and T2).

You must enter the radius of the tangent arc, the X and Y coordinates for the first circle's center point, the radius of the
first circle, the X and Y coordinates for the second circle's center point, and the second circle's radius.
F7 – Intersection: Line Line
You must enter the X and Y coordinates for 1 point on each line, and also one of the following:
* the X and Y coordinates for a second point
* the X coordinate for a second point and the angle from horizontal
* the Y coordinate for a second point and the angle from horizontal
* the angle from horizontal only
F8 – Intersection: Line Arc

Given the center (C1) and radius (R) of an arc, 1 point (P1) and either a second point (P2) or one coordinate (P2 X or
Y) and the angle from horizontal, find the intersection point(s) (I1 and I2).
You must enter the X and Y coordinates for the circle's center point, the circle's radius, the X and Y coordinates for
one point on the line, and one of the following:
* the X and Y coordinates of a second point on the line

* the X coordinate of a second point and the angle from horizontal
* the Y coordinate of a second point and the angle from horizontal
F9 – Intersection: Arc Arc
Given the center points (C1 and C2) and the radii (R1 and R2) of two arcs, find the intersection point(s) (I1 and I2) of
the arcs.

Importing DXF files
Intercon allows you to convert geometry in DXF files to Intercon operations. To insert operations from a DXF file,
press F8 - Import DXF from the Insert Other operations menu. If no DXF files have been loaded yet, the Intercon
load file menu will appear. From here you may select the DXF file you wish to load. By default, Intercon expects DXF
files to reside in the c:\cnc10\ncfiles directory. To change the default directory used by the Intercon load menu when
loading DXF files, see the “User Specified Paths” section of Chapter 14.
Intercon reads DXF files up to and including version R14. At this time, only point, line, arc, circle, polyline and
lwpolyline entities can be used to create Intercon operations. All other entities such as text must be converted to lines
and arcs for them to appear in the Intercon Import DXF menu.
After a DXF file has been loaded, the Set zero reference menu appears.
This menu allows you to change the absolute zero reference of the DXF file. The current zero reference appears as a
green cross. All other points appear as gray crosses. A new zero reference may be defined by a combination the
following methods:
• Press F1 - Input Zero to enter the coordinates of the new zero reference.
• Move the crosshairs with the arrow keys to highlight a point (represented by a gray cross) and
when the crosshairs are close to a gray cross it will change red. Press F2 - Set Zero to set the zero
reference to the position of that point.
When satisfied with the current location of the zero reference, press F10 - Accept. The zero reference may be changed
multiple times before pressing F10 - Accept.

After the zero reference is set the Select Intercon operation menu appears.
This menu allows you to select the type of Intercon operation you wish to create using geometry from the DXF file.
F1 – Contour
Convert one or more connected lines and/or arcs to linear and arc operations.
F2 – Pocket
Convert a chain of lines and/or arcs to one of the Intercon pocket operations. The type of pocket depends on the
geometry of the selected chain. A chain of arcs will be converted to a circular pocket if all arcs have the same center
point and radius. A chain of four lines forming a rectangle will be converted to a rectangular pocket. All other chains
will be converted into a cleanout operation.
F3 – Frame
Create a frame operation that surrounds a chain of lines and/or arcs. The height, width and center of the chain are used
to define the frame.
F4 – Drill
Convert one or more points to a drilling operation.
F5 – Bore
Convert one or more points to a boring operation.
F6 – Tap
Convert one or more points to a tapping operation.
F7 – Thread
Convert one or more points to a threading operation.

F8 – Engrave (Optional)
Convert the entire file to engraving operations. Choosing this option displays the engraving menu. Set the options as
desired for the engraving. Surface Height is the height of the surface to be engraved. Clearance Height is the height
that the engraving tool will move up to clear the surface. Depth is the depth of the engraving. Set the Plunge Rate and
Feedrate appropriately for the tool and material.
F10 – File
Pressing F10 - File displays the following options:
F1 - Load - Load a new DXF file.
F2 - Zero - Change the current zero reference.
F3 - Gap - Modify the current gap tolerance. Two lines or arcs are connected if the distance between their end points
is less than the gap tolerance.
Selecting DXF geometry

After selecting an operation to from the Select Intercon operation menu, one of two menus appears. Contour, pocket
and frame operations display the Select Chain menu and Drill, Bore, Tap and Thread operations display the Select
Point menu. These menus allow you to select the geometry you wish to use to create the specified Intercon
operation(s).
Select Chain menu

This menu allows you to select a chain of one or more lines and/or arcs. To select a chain, highlight the first line or arc
with the crosshairs. Press either F2 - Single to accept only that object or press F3 - Chain to accept that object and
create a chain of lines and arcs connected to that entity. When satisfied with the selected chain, press F10 - Done to
edit the values for the chosen Intercon operation.
Ç È Å Æ (Arrow Keys) – Move crosshairs

Use the arrow keys to move the crosshairs.
F1 – Reverse
When a line or arc is highlighted, an arrow appears indicating the direction of the object. Contour operations use this
direction when cutting lines and arcs. To reverse the direction of the highlighted line or arc, press F1 - Reverse.

F2 – Single
Select the currently highlighted line or arc.
F3 – Chain
Select the currently highlighted line or arc and create a chain of connected lines or arcs in the direction of this selected
object. Chaining will stop if there are no more connected, unselected lines or arcs, or the chain connects to the first
object in the chain, or a branch point occurs. A branch point occurs when the last object in the chain is connected to
more than one unselected lines or arcs. When this situation occurs, highlight the desired unselected line or arc that
connects to the last object in the chain and press F3 - Chain to continue chaining.
F5 – Undo
Unselect the last line or arc in the chain.
F6 – Pan
Set the plot center to the center of the crosshairs.
F7, F8 & F9 - Zoom In, Zoom Out & Zoom All

F7 - Zoom In and F8 - Zoom Out, set the center of the plot to the center of the crosshairs and Zoom In and Zoom Out
respectively. F9 - Zoom All redraws the part with its original scale.
F10 – Done
Accepts the selected chain and proceeds to the Intercon operation edit menu. The operation edit menu allows you to
enter values for fields such as feedrate and plunge rate. These values are copied to the rest of the lines and arcs in the
chain where applicable.
The keys F1 - Reverse, F2 - Single and F3 - Chain only appear when a line or arc is highlighted. The keys F5 - Undo
and F10 - Done only appear when one or more objects has been selected with F2 - Single or F3 - Chain.

Select Point menu
This menu allows you to select one or more points to be converted into Intercon Drilling/Threading operations. In this
menu, all selectable points are displayed as gray crosses. Selectable points include point entities, line/arc endpoints and
arc/circle center points. To select a point, position the crosshairs over the desired point until the cross turns red and
press F2 - Single to accept the point. More points can be selected by highlighting them with the crosshairs and
pressing F2 - Single. F1 - Window can be used to select all points within a specified window. When satisfied with the
selected point(s), press F10 - Done to edit the Intercon operation parameters.
Ç È Å Æ (Arrow Keys) – Move crosshairs

Press the arrow keys to move the crosshairs.
F1 – Window
This key allows you to select all points within a specified box. Press F1 - Window once to set the first corner of the
box. Move the crosshairs to the desired location for the opposite corner of the box and press F1 - Window. All points
within the box are selected.
F2 – Single
Accept the currently highlighted point.
F5 – Undo
Unselect the last selected point.
F6, F7, F8 & F9 – Pan, Zoom In, Zoom Out & Zoom All
These keys perform the same operations they do in the Select Chain menu.

F10 – Done
Accepts the selected points and proceeds to the Intercon operation edit menu. The operation edit menu allows you to
enter values for fields such as plunge rate and depth. These values are copied to the rest of the selected operations
where applicable.
The key F2 - Single only appears when a point is highlighted. The keys F5 - Undo and F10 - Done only appear when
one or more points have been selected with F1 - Window or F2 - Single.
Using a mouse
In addition to the arrow keys, a mouse may be used to position the crosshairs in the DXF selection menus. Simply
move the mouse pointer to the desired crosshair location and click the left mouse button. This action will move the
crosshairs to the location of the mouse click and highlight the closest object.

Intercon Tutorial #1
This is a step-by-step instructional example of going from blueprint to part with Intercon. The tool path to be created
is for the part shown in Figure 1. For instructional purposes, this part will be programmed to cut into stock held in 3
fixtures, 6 inches apart along the X-axis.
FIG. 1 Blueprint of flange part and the 3 fixtures.

Part Creation
Each feature of the part will become an operation in your program. Before beginning, decide where you want the X0
and Y0 reference. For this particular part, the center of the bolt hole pattern was selected. Now start the Intercon
program (from the CNC10 Main screen, press F5 - CAM). Beginning from the Intercon File Menu (press F1 - File if
the file menu is not shown) the following series of keystrokes will describe the step-by-step process of designing the
part shown in Figure 1.
PRESS COMMENTS
F1 - New Fill in the program name flange. Enter your name in as the
programmer. Enter the description as “Intercon Tutorial #1”.
F4 - Tool Describe the tool below. The position values specify where to do
the tool change. This position should be a point outside of the
workpiece so that the last tool can be removed from the chuck
and the new tool can be inserted. The Yes in the 'Actual Tool
Change' field turns off the spindle and coolant upon reaching this
spot. Use a 0.3750-inch diameter cutter. The length and diameter
are updated based on the offsets. (The longest tool should have a
0.0000 length).
N0020 Tool change
Tool Number : 1
Description : 3/8" end mill
Position: X : -2.0000
Y : -2.0000
Tool H Offset : 1
Tool Height : 0.0000
Tool D Offset : 1
Tool Diameter : 0.3750
Spindle Speed : 1000
Spindle Direction : CW (M3)
Coolant Type : Flood (M8)
Actual Tool Change : Yes
F10 - Accept Keep selected values.
F5 - Cycles Access the list of available Canned Cycles.
F6 - Circ. Pocket Start with the 1.0000-inch diameter circular pocket. Enter the
following values:

N0030 Circular pocket
Center: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Surface Height : 0.0000
Diameter : 1.0000
Cleanout : Yes
Depth: Total : 0.5000 INC
Per Pass : 0.2500
Plunge Rate : 2.0000 [M]
Plunge Type : Ramped
Plunge Angle : 0.00°
Rough Cuts : Conventional
Stepover : 0.2250
Feedrate : 20.0000 [M]
Finish Pass : Climb
Amount : 0.0020
F1 - Drill Select drilling cycles
F2 - Drill BHC Select the bolt hole circle type of drilling cycles
N0040 Drill bolt holes
Cycle Type : Drilling

Center: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Clearance Height : 0.2500 INC
'Rapid To' Depth : 0.1000 INC
Plunge Rate : 2.0000
Dwell Time : 0.0000
Number of holes : 4
Radius : 1.2500
Start angle : 45.00°
F8 - Graph Display a preview of the part up to this point. This preview can
be used to detect problems that may occur if the part was cut now.

FIG. 2 - Graphics screen showing bolt holes and circular pocket
ESC/CANCEL Return to the editing screen.
F5 -Cycles Access the list of available Canned Cycles.
F7 - Frame Now add an outside frame to cut the flange out of the material.
The flange is 3.0000 inches long by 3.0000 inches wide, and has
rounded corners with 0.2500-inch radii.
N0050 Frame mill
Frame : Outside Rect

Center: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Length X : 3.0000 INC
Width Y : 3.0000 INC
Corner Radius : 0.2500
per Pass : 0.2500
Plunge Angle : 0.00°
Cut Type : Conventional
Feedrate : 10.0000
F8 - Graph Display a preview of the part up to this point. This preview can
be used to detect problems that may occur if the part was cut now.

FIG. 3 - Graphics screen showing part with bolt holes and outer frame
F9 - Subpgm Access the Insert Subprogram screen.
F2 - Repeat We programmed the part to cut one copy only. We now want to
repeat the part 2 more times at an incremental distance of 6 inches
along the X-axis. The part can now be cut into the stock mounted
into the two other fixtures. The part begins with the circular
pocket in operation #0003 and ends with the linear mill in
operation #0005. Press F2 - Z Home to enter “Home” for
“Clearance Height.
N0060 Repeat
Start Block : N0003

End Block : N0005
Increment X : 6.0000
Y : 0.0000
Clearance Height : Home
Number of copies : 2
F8 - Graph Display a preview of the parts. This preview can be used to

detect problems that may occur if the part was cut now.
ESC/CANCEL Return to Repeat Subprogram.
F10 - Accept Keep selected values if you wish to cut these two extra parts. If
you do not wish to do this, press ESC/CANCEL.

ESC/CANCEL Creation of the part is complete. Intercon programs automatically
turn the spindle and coolant off at the end.
F1 - File Press F3 - Save to save the part under its current name. Press F4
- Save As to save it under a new name.
F10 - Post The CNC file needed to run this part on your mill will be
generated at this time. The Intercon program displays the
operation number of the part it is processing as it works through
each operation in memory:
As it processes each operation, it checks for values that, if used,

will cause incorrect code to be produced. If such a value is
found, a message will appear on the screen alerting you of the
problem. For example, a problem with a Frame Mill may
produce this message:
Changes to the part would then be required to allow proper code

generation to proceed. If no problems are encountered during
code generation, the following message appears:
You are now finished designing your part. In order to run

your part, you now need to return to the CNC10 software.
Program Finished!

Milling The Part
Now that the part has been programmed, it is time to mill it. Take your material and clamp it to the table. Remember
that the clamps must be positioned such that they do not interfere with the tool as it cuts. You may choose either to
place the clamps around the edges of the material for the entire process and let the part drop through upon completion,
or you may wish to pause after milling the circular pockets and place clamps through the holes to prevent the part from
moving. The second option decreases the chance of the part being marred because it moved during milling.
Now you need to set your XYZ reference points. Insert your longest tool in the quill and follow the procedure listed
below:
PRESS COMMENTS
JOG KEYS Jog the table so that your tool rests on the stock at the location
that will represent X0 and Y0.
F1 - Setup Enter the main program (CNC10) Setup screen. We are going to
establish the part XYZ zero at the current tool location.
F1 - Part Access the Part Setup options.
F10 - Set Set your X zero position at current tool location.
F1 - Next Axis Select the Y-axis next.
F10 - Set Set your Y zero position at current tool location.
F1 - Next Axis Select the Z-axis next.
F10 - Set Set your Z zero position at current tool location.
TOOL CHECK Moves the quill to the Z home position if the home position
has been set. Moves tool to Z+limit switch and sets home
position if not.
ESC/CANCEL Leave Part Setup screen.
F2 - Tool Access Tool Library Editor. This is the place where we want to
measure the actual heights of our tools (since we could not set the
actual values in Intercon).
F1 - Offset Lib. You need to make sure that the tool diameter and height offset
values are the correct ones for the tools you are going to be using.
Inspect the values for D001 and H001. D001 should be 0.375,
H1 should be 0.0000 (the two inch tool). If either of these values
are incorrect, use the arrow keys to select the incorrect values.
Enter the new values in their places and press ENTER to accept
them.
NOTE: The tool heights used above are merely example heights.
In order to accurately measure the heights of your tools, see the
description of measuring tool heights in Chapter 5.
F10 - Save Keep the updated tool offset library values.
F2 - Tool Lib. Now you need to make sure that each tool uses the correct
diameter and height offset values. Inspect the values for T001.
T1 should use H001 and D001. If any of these values are
incorrect, use the arrow keys to select the incorrect values. Enter
the new values in their places and press ENTER to accept them.
You may also select spindle and coolant settings for your tools
here, or enter a short description of the tool.
F10 - Save Keep the updated Tool Library values.
ESC/CANCEL Leave Tool Setup. Return to the CNC10 Setup Screen.
ESC/CANCEL Leave CNC10 Setup. Return to the CNC10 Main Screen.
CYCLE START The CYCLE START button is located on your jog panel. This
key will cause the mill to begin cutting your part
Tutorial Complete!

Intercon Tutorial #2
This demonstration will show you how to create a tool path for a part from a blueprint using the Math Help function of
Intercon. The tool path to be created is for the part shown in Figure 1 below.
4.0000"
2.0000" 1.0000"
0.9250"
0.3750"
45 0.1875"
0.6000" 0.6250"
0.7500" x 0.4250"
1.2500" R 3.1500" R
FIG. 1 - Part to be machined .

Part Creation
The process of creating a part is called part programming. Each feature of the part will become an operation in your
program. Before beginning, decide where you want the X0 and Y0 reference. For this particular demo, the center of
the Bolt Hole pattern was selected for convenience). Beginning from the Intercon File Menu (press F1 - File if the file
menu is not shown) the following series of keystrokes will describe the step-by-step process of designing the part
shown in Figure 1.

PRESS COMMENTS
F1 - New Create a new program by filling in the appropriate program name

(we recommend c_rod) and your name. Press Enter or F10 -
Accept to accept the new name. Enter “Intercon Tutorial #2” for
the description. Press F10 - Accept to accept.
F4 - Tool Describe the tool below. The position values specify where to do
the tool change. The Yes in the 'Actual Tool Change' field turns
off the spindle and coolant upon reaching this spot. Use a 0.1875
inch drill. The height and diameter are updated based on the
offsets. (The longest tool should have a 0.0000 height offset). If
this tool does not have the desired spindle (CW) and coolant
(Flood) settings, you should also select these values to match
your particular machine setup.
N0002 Tool change
Tool Number : 1
Description : 0.187” Drill
Position: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Tool H Offset : 1
(Tool Height : 0.0000)
Tool D Offset : 1
Notice for this particular screen, the Tool height shows '0.0000', since it has the same tool height as the Reference tool.
However, your screen may differ since Intercon cannot change the Reference tool height in the Tool Library. This will
change when you run this program. Refer to the Measuring Tool Heights in Chapter 5 for more details.
F1 - Drill Select drilling cycles
F2 - Drill BHC Select a bolt hole circle operation.
The clearance height is the Z height from which the downward rapid traverse begins before each hole. It is also the Z
height to which the tool returns upon completion of drilling the hole.
The 'Rapid To' depth is the Z height to which the

tool rapid traverses before drilling a hole.

FIG. 2 - Bolt Hole Circle
N0003 Drill bolt holes
Cycle Type : Drilling

Center: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Clearance Height : 0.5000 INC
'Rapid To' Depth : 0.1000 INC
Plunge Rate : 2.0000[M]

Dwell Time : 0.0000
Number of holes : 5
Radius : 0.9250
Start angle : 45.00°
F4 - Tool Use a 0.2500 diameter end mill now. Notice that the tool height
shown below is a negative value. This value represents the
difference in height between this tool and the longest tool being
used. The longest tool used (in this case, operation N0020 above)
has a height of 0.0000. Again, do not be alarmed if the Tool
Height is not -1 for operation N0040. If this tool does not have
the desired spindle (CW) and coolant (Flood) settings, you should
also enter values specific to your machine setup.
N0004 Tool change

Tool Number : 2
Description : 0.250 Dia End Mill
Position: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Tool H Offset : 2
(Tool Height) : (Your tool)
Tool D Offset : 2
F5 - Cycles Access the list of available canned cycles.
F6 - Circ. Pocket Start with 1.2000 inch diameter Pocket.
Center: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Diameter : 1.2000
Cleanout : Yes
Per Pass : 0.2500
Plunge Rate : 2.0000 [M]
Plunge Angle : 0.00 °
Stepover : 0.2000
Finish Pass : Climb
Amount : 0.1000
F5 - Cycles Access the list of available canned cycles.
F6 - Circ. Pocket Repeat above pocket cycle. The center X value 4.0000 and the
diameter is 0.7500 inches.

Center: X
: 4.0000
Y
: 0.0000
Diameter : 0.7500
Cleanout : Yes
Per Pass : 0.2500
Stepover : 0.2000
Feedrate : 2.0000
Finish Pass : Climb
Amount : 0.1000
Feedrate : 2.0000
F5 - Rect. Pocket Cut the first rectangular pocket.
N0070 Rectangular pocket
Center: X : 2.0000
Y : 0.0000
Length (X) : 0.7500 INC
Width (Y) : 0.4250 INC
Per Pass : 0.2500
Stepover : 0.1000
Feedrate : 2.0000
Finish Pass : None
Amount : 0.0000
Feedrate : 2.0000
F5 - Rect. Pocket Repeat above Pocket cycle. The center X value lies at 3.0000.
N0080 Rectangular pocket

Center: X : 3.0000
Y : 0.0000
Length (X) : 0.7500 INC
Width (Y) : 0.4250 INC
Per Pass : 0.2500
Stepover : 0.1000
Feedrate : 2.0000
Finish Pass : None
Amount : 0.0000
Feedrate : 2.0000
F7 - Cutter Comp Hit Space until Left cutter compensation is selected. The tool
must move outside of the part outline at a distance at least equal
to its radius so the part outline is the correct size. Cutter
compensation should be turned on before a rapid to maintain
proper line and arc travel.
N0009 Comp left
F1 - Rapid Move to a location outside the part. The purpose of this move is
to prepare to use cutter compensation on the tool.
N0010 Rapid traverse
End: X : 5.0000
Y : 0.5000
Z : 0.1000
Angle : 14.0365°
Length : 2.0615
F3 - Arc Mill up to the edge of the part to cut the first arc. This is called a
lead-in move. The cutter compensation selected above needs a
lead-in move in order to position the cutter before milling the
actual part.

N0011 Arc
Arc Type: : EP&R

Mid X :
Y :
Z :
End X : 4.625
Y : 0.0000
Z : -0.0500
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : .5
Plane : XY
Direction : CCW
Connect Radius : 0.0000
Feedrate : 10.0000
Angle <= 180 : Yes
You will see that after you enter in these values, the other points
and arcs will be entered in automatically.
F3 - Arc The first arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 1 in Figure 3 below. The
start point, labeled P1, is the end point of the previous move. The
end point of the arc will be generated with Math Help. We will
be using end point and radius (EP&R) arcs.
ARC 4
P 4 3 .1 5 0 0 " R
ARC 5
0 .6 2 5 0 " R
P5
253.69 ( 0 .0 ,0 . 0 ) ( 4 .0 ,0 .0 ) 222.28 P1
P2 ARC 1
0 .6 2 5 0 " R
P3 ARC 2
3 .1 5 0 0 " R
ARC 3
1 .2 5 0 0 " R
FIG 3. - Tangent point and arc reference.

N0012 Arc
Arc type : EP&R

Mid X :
Y :
Z :
End: X : 4.6250
Y : 0.0000
Z : -0.0500
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : .625
Plane : XY
Direction : CW
Connect Radius : 0.0000
Feedrate : 10.0000
Angle <= 180° : Yes
F6 - Math Help We are trying to find end points for the arcs that make up the
outside edge of the part. Note: the main Math Help menu will
listing all available Math Help solvers.
F6 - Tangent Arc Arc Arc This scenario will generate tangent points P2 - P5 of Figure 3.
Enter the values as shown below:
Arc Tangent Arcs:
Circle 1:
X : 4.0000
Y : 0.0000
Radius : 0.6250
Circle 2:
X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Radius : 1.2500
Radius : 3.1500
Intercon will calculate the missing values for this scenario.
F2 - Next Soln Find scenario that corresponds to the actual arcs being milled.
Observe Figure 4. Point T1 is the one needed.

FIG. 4 - Screen showing Math Help Arc Tangent Arc solutions
ARROWS If necessary, move the block cursor to the Tangent 1 X field as

shown above. Note: Use only <↑> and <↓>. If you press the
right arrow, press the left arrow to get back to the Math Help
fields.
F9 - Graphic on/off Press to hide the graphical display and reveal the arc operation
behind it.
→ (ARROW) Move the cursor to the arc operation. The solid block cursor on
the left side of the screen will be replaced by an outlined
rectangle and the solid block will appear in the arc operation on
the right.
ARROWS Move the block cursor to the End X field of the arc operation. As
before, use only <↑> and <↓>.
F8 - Copy >>> Transfer the tangent point T1 value for X into the end point X
coordinate. The active fields on both sides of the screen advance
automatically.
F8 - Copy >>> Transfer the tangent point T1 value for Y into the end point Y
coordinate.
ARROWS Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of the arc
labeled as ARC 1 in Figure 3. (This radius is 0.6250 in.).

Arc type : EP&R
Mid X :
Y :
Z :
End X : 3.7746
Y : -0.5829
Z : -0.0500
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : 0.6250
Plane : XY
Direction : CW
Feedrate : 10.0000
F6 - Hide Math Hide Math Help temporarily. (We will return later to pick up the
other tangent points.)
F8 - Graph Observe Figure 5. The graphics show a preview of the part up to

this point. This preview can be used to detect problems that may
occur if the part was cut now.
FIG. 5 - Draw screen showing Bolt Holes, Pockets and first arc of part
F10 - Accept Keep selected values. The other arc values were calculated for
you.

F3 - Arc The next arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 2 in Figure 3. The start
point is labeled P2, the end point of the last arc.
N0013 Arc
↑↓(UP/DOWN) Move down to the End X field. This selects End X as the
destination of the Math Help solution.
F6 - Math Help Redisplay the Math Help values calculated for the last arc. The
screen will look like figure 6, below.
FIG. 6 – New arc 2 entry screen shown with solution for arcs 1 and 2 of Figure 3.
↑↓(UP/DOWN) If necessary, move the block cursor to the Tangent 2 X field as

shown above. The rectangle at End X shows that it will be the
destination of the copy.
automatically.
coordinate.
F6 - Hide Math Hide Math Help temporarily.
↑↓(UP/DOWN) Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of the arc
labeled ARC 2 in Figure 3 (this radius is 3.1500 inches). Set the
direction to “CCW”.
Arc type : EP&R

Mid X :
Y :
Z :
End: X : 0.7496
Y : -1.0003
Z : -0.0500
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : 3.1500
Plane : XY
Direction : CCW
Feedrate : 10.0000
F3 - Arc The third arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 3 in Figure 3. The start
point is labeled P2, the end point of the previous arc. The end
point of the arc will be generated with Math Help.
N0014 Arc
↑↓(UP/DOWN) Move down to the End X field. This selects End X as the
F6 - Math Help Redisplay the Math Help values calculated for the last arcs.
F9 - Graphic on/off Redisplays the diagram of the scenario selected to calculate arcs 1
and 2 on Figure 3.
F1 - Prev Soln Continue pressing F1 until you arrive at the scenario showing arcs
3 and 4 in Figure 3 (in this case, solution #1 is the appropriate
one)

FIG. 7 - Math Help solution for arcs 3 and 4.
↑↓( ARROWS) Press to highlight the needed tangent point X coordinate in Math
Help. Tangent point T2 is the one you want this time.
→ (ARROW) Press to remove the graphic display and move the cursor to the
arc operation. (This shortcut saves you from pressing F9 –-
Graphic on/off to hide the graphics each time.) The solid block
cursor on the left side of the screen will be replaced by an
outlined rectangle and the solid block will appear in the arc
operation on the right.
↑↓( ARROWS) Move the block cursor to the End X field of the arc operation.
automatically.
coordinate.
↑↓(ARROWS) Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of the arc
labeled ARC 3 in Figure 3. (This radius is 1.2500 inches). Also,
enter in No for the angle of this arc, since it is greater than 180°.

Arc type : EP&R
Mid: X :
Y :
Z :
End: X : 0.7496
Y : 1.0003
Z : -0.0500
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : 1.2500
Plane : XY
Direction : CW
Feedrate : 10.0000
Angle <= 180° : No
F3 - Arc The fourth arc to be cut is labeled as ARC 4 in Figure 3. The start
point, labeled P3, is the end point of the previous arc. The end
point of the arc will be generated with Math Help.
N0015 Arc mill
↑↓(ARROWS) Move down to the End X field. This selects End X as the
F6 - Math Help Re-display the Math Help values calculated for the last arc.
FIG. 8 - New arc 4 entry screen shown with solution for arcs 3 and 4 of Figure 3.

↑↓(UP/DOWN) Highlight the needed tangent point X. Tangent point T1 is the
one you want this time.
ARROWS If necessary, move the cursor to the arc operation and select the
End X field.
automatically.
coordinate.
F6 - Hide Math Hide Math Help.
ARROWS Move down to the radius field and enter the radius of the arc
labeled ARC 4 in Figure 3. (This radius is 3.1500 inches). Be
sure to set the direction to CCW.
Arc type : EP&R

Mid: X :
Y :
Z :
End: X : 3.7746
Y : 0.5829
Z : -0.0500
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : 3.1500
Plane : XY
Direction : CCW
Feedrate : 10.0000
F3 - Arc Mill the arc labeled as ARC 5 in Figure 3 back to point P1.

N0016 Arc mill
Operation type : EP&R

Mid: X :
Y :
Z :
End: X : 4.6250
Y : 0.0000
Z : -0.5000
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : 0.6250
Plane : XY
Direction : CW
Feedrate : 10.0000
F3 - Arc Move tool away from the edge of the part after the last arc.
N0017 Arc mill
Arc type : EP&R

Mid: X :
Y :
Z :
End: X : 5.0000
Y : -0.5000
Z : 0.1000
Center: X :
Y :
Z :
Angle :
Radius : 0.5000
Plane : XY
Direction : CCW
Feedrate : 10.0000
Angle <=180° : Yes
F9 - Subpgm Access the Subprogram screen.

F1 - Depth Repeat We programmed the outer contour of the part so that our tool
would only penetrate a small portion of the material per pass. We
now want to repeat the outer contour operations until the tool has
cut the entire way through the material (the assumed material
thickness is 0.5 inches). The outer contour begins with the
Plunge in operation N0011 and ends with the Linear Mill in
operation N0017.
N0018 Repeat to Depth
Start Block : 0011

End Block : 0017
Total Depth : 0.5100 INC
Depth Increment : 0.0500 INC
Clearance Height : 0.2500
F7 - Cutter Comp Hit the space bar until cutter compensation is turned 'Off'. It is no
longer needed.
N0019 Comp off
F1 - Rapid Move the tool away from the part. This is called a lead-out move.
When cutter compensation is turned off, the compensation is
removed during the next move. This must be done to allow the
CNC10 software to correct its position.
N0020 Rapid traverse
End: X : 0.0000
Y : 0.0000
Z : 3.0000
Angle : 174.2894°
Length : 5.0249
ESC/CANCEL Creation of the part is complete. Intercon programs automatically

turn the spindle and coolant off at the end.
F8 - Graph Display a preview of the finished part. Just make sure that the
finished part is going to look the way you want it to. The display
shown in Figure 7 has rulers placed around the various view
windows that are scaled to the same size as the part displayed to
allow visual inspection of the part. Remember, this preview
shows where the center of the current tool will move (cutter
compensation is not represented except in pocket and frame
displays).

FIG. 9 - Draw screen showing complete part
ESC/CANCEL Return to Main screen.
F1 - File Go to the File Menu. Press F3 - Save to save under the current
file name or press F4 - Save As to save the program under a
different name.
F10 - Post The CNC file needed to run this part on your mill will be
generated at this time. The Intercon program displays the
operation number of the part it is processing as it works through
each operation in memory:

As it processes each operation, it checks for values that, if used,
will cause incorrect code to be produced. If such a value is
found, a message will appear on the screen alerting you of the
problem. For example, a problem with a rectangular pocket may
produce this message:
Changes to the part would then be required to allow proper code

generation to proceed. If no problems are encountered during
code generation, the following message appears:
You are now at the main menu again.
You are now finished designing your part. In order to run your
part, you now need to return to the CNC10 software.
Program Finished!

Milling The Part
Now that the part has been programmed, it is time to mill it. Take your material and clamp it to the table. Remember
that the clamps must be positioned such that they do not interfere with the tool as it cuts. You may choose either to
place the clamps around the edges of the material for the entire process and let the part drop through upon completion,
or you may wish to pause after milling the circular pockets and place clamps through the holes to prevent the part from
moving. The second option decreases the chance of the part being marred because it moved during milling.
Now you need to set your XYZ reference points. Insert your longest tool in the quill and follow the procedure listed
below:
PRESS COMMENTS
JOG KEYS Jog the table so that your tool rests on the stock at the location
that will represent X0 and Y0.
F1 - Setup Enter the CNC10 Setup screen. We are going to establish the part
XYZ zero at the current tool location.
F1 - Part Access the Part Setup options.
F10 - Set Set your X zero position at current tool location.
F1 - Next Axis Select the Y-axis next.
F10 - Set Set your Y zero position at current tool location.
F1 - Next Axis Select the Z-axis next.
F10 - Set Set your Z zero position at current tool location.
TOOL CHECK Moves the quill to the Z home position if the home position
has been set. Moves tool to Z+limit switch and sets home
position if not.
ESC/CANCEL Leave Part Setup screen.
F2 -Tool Access Tool Library Editor. This is the place where we want to
measure the actual heights of our tools (since we could not set the
actual values in Intercon).
F1 - Offset Lib. You need to make sure that the tool diameter and height offset
values are the correct ones for the tools you are going to be using.
Inspect the values for D001, H001, D002 and H002. D001
should be 0.1875, H1 should be 0.0000 (the two inch tool),
D002 should be 0.2500 and H002 should be -1.0000 (the one inch
tool). If any of these values are incorrect, use the arrow keys to
select the incorrect values. Enter the new values in their places
and press ENTER to accept them.
NOTE: The tool heights used above are merely example heights. In order to accurately measure the heights of
your tools, see the description of measuring tool heights in Chapter 5.
F10 - Save Keep the updated tool offset library values.

F2 - Tools Now you need to make sure that each tool uses the correct
diameter and height offset values. Inspect the values for T001
and T002. T1 should use H001 and D001, while T002 should use
H002 and D002. If any of these values are incorrect, use the
arrow keys to select the incorrect values. Enter the new values in
their places and press ENTER to accept them. You may also
select spindle and coolant settings for your tools here, or enter a
short description of the tool.
F10 - Save Keep the updated Tool Library values.
ESC/CANCEL Leave Tool Setup. Return to the CNC10 Setup Screen.
ESC/CANCEL Leave CNC10 Setup. Return to the CNC10 Main Screen.
CYCLE START The CYCLE START/START button is located on your jog

panel. This key will cause the mill to begin cutting your part.
Tutorial Complete!

Measuring Tool Heights
The following is a brief description of the method used to measure tool height values (offsets). You will need to insert
a reference tool into the quill before beginning. For more information also see chapter 5.
PRESS ACTION COMMENTS
F1 - Setup From the main screen enter the Setup.
F2 - Tool Enter tool screen.
F1 - Offset Lib. Enter the tool offsets screen.
JOG ARROWS You need to jog your reference tool down so it touches the top of
some surface.
F1 - Z Ref Set your Z reference position. This is the value that appears on
the DRO when the reference tool touches the top of the surface.
TOOL CHECK Move the quill up to the Z home position. Insert the first
tool to measure.
ARROWS Select height offset which holds the height of the first tool.
JOG ARROWS Jog the tool down until it touches the same surface as did the
reference tool.
F2 - Manual Record the height of the first tool.
Now repeat the last four steps above (from TOOL CHECK to F2
- Manual) for each additional tool to measure.
F10 - Save Store modifications to offset library of your tools.

Chapter 11
CNC Program Codes
General
The next three chapters contain a description of the CNC program codes and parameters supported by the M-Series
Control. The M-Series Control has some G codes and parameters that are modal, and some that are "one shots."
The G codes and parameters that are modal will stay in effect until a new G code or parameter is issued. One shots
are effective for the current line only. For example, a movement command of G1, which is modal, will remain in
effect until a different movement command is issued, such as G0, G2, G3, etc.
Miscellaneous CNC Program Symbols
D - Tool Diameter Offset Number

D is used to select the Tool Diameter Offset from the offset library. The D code values are stored in the Offset
Library. Tool Diameter Offsets can be specified anytime before Cutter Comp is turned on (G41 or G42). Once
specified, the offset amount is stored and will only be changed when another D code is entered therefore, D is
modal. The Tool Diameter Offset (D) can be placed on a line by itself or on a line with other G-codes.
Example:
X0Y0F10 ;
G41 D2 ; Enables cutter comp left with diameter D2.
G1X0Y0 ;
X1Y1.25 ; Cutter compensated moves
X2Y1.4 ;
G40 ; Cutter compensation off
G42 ; Enables cutter comp. right (still using D2)
E - Select Work Coordinate System

E1 through E18 select among the 18 work coordinate systems. For more information on work coordinate systems
see chapter 4.
F - Feedrate
The F command is used to set the cutting feedrate. The feedrate is expressed in units/minute. The programmed
feedrate may be modified by the feedrate override knob (2 - 200% for DC systems and 2 – 100% for AC systems).
The default feedrate is 3.0 units/minute. Units may be inches or millimeters.
Example:
G90 G1 X1.0 F50 ; linear mill to X1 at 50 units/minute

H - Tool Length Offset Number
H is used to select the Tool Length Offset Number. The H code offset amounts are stored in the file Offset Library.
Tool Length Offsets can be specified anytime before a G43 or G44 is issued. Once specified the offset amount is
stored and will only be changed when another H code is entered therefore, H is modal. The Tool Length Offset (H)
can be placed on a line by itself or on a line with other G-codes. H00 is always a 0.0 length offset.
Example:
H1 ; Selects offset corresponding to H1.
G43 Z3 ; Moves to Z3 using H1 offset.
G1X0Y1 ;
H3 ; Selects offset corresponding to H3.
X1Y1.25 ;
G0H5 ; Selects offset corresponding to H5.
* NOTE: For editing instruction for the offset library see chapter 5. For information on length compensation
functions see G43 and G44 in Chapter 12.
N - Block Number
Block numbers are used to identify CNC program lines. Block numbers are optional, but can be used as the
destinations of GOTO statements (see Advanced Macros in this chapter) and targets of the Search Function (See
Main Screen Search option in Chapter 3). Block numbers also can make reading the NC files easier.
Example:
N1 G90 G17 M25
N2 G0 X0 Y0 Z0
O - Program Number
The O program number allows you to identify your program with a certain number.
If the program number is 9100-9999, the G codes from the O number through the next M99 will be extracted and
placed in a separate subprogram/macro file. The lines will not be executed until the resulting file is called with M98
or G65.
Example:
O1521
N1 G90 G17 M25
N2 G0 X0 Y0 Z0
P - Parameter
P can correspond to Dwell Time, subprogram number, or a general parameter in canned cycles. This is used as a
variable for any of those values in the NC file.
Examples:
G4 P1.32 ; Pause execution for 1.32 seconds
G10 P73 R.1 ; Set parameter #73 (G73 retract) to .1 inches

Q - Parameter
Q is used as a depth parameter in canned drilling cycles.
Example:
G73 X1.5 Y2.0 Z-.75 R.25 Q.25 F5 ; Q Sets the depth cut at .25
R - Radius, Return Point, Parameter

R can represent the radius, a return point, or a general parameter. This is used as a variable for any of those values
in the NC file. R is similar to the P parameter.
Examples:
G10 D5 R.5 ; sets tool diameter #5 to 0.5” in the offset library
G81 X0 Y0 Z-.5 R.1 F15 ; drill to Z-.5 with return height of .1
S - Spindle Speed Setting

Specifying a spindle speed causes the automatic spindle speed setting to be immediately updated. Setting the
spindle speed does not cause the spindle to start. The maximum spindle speed is used to compute the output value
to the spindle speed control circuit.
Example:
S1400 M3 ; Starts the spindle CW at 1400 RPM
* NOTE: The Spindle Speed is used in conjunction with the maximum spindle speed to determine the actual
spindle speed output to the PLC. Also, this only works when a VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) spindle drive is
connected.
T - Select Tool
Prompts the operator to insert the proper tool or change tools, when M6 is encountered.
Example:
T1 M6 ; Prompt operator to load tool number 1
T2 ; no action
G0X0Y0 ; move to X0 Y0
M6 ; prompt operator to load tool number 2
: - Visible Comment Identifier

The colon (:) is used to indicate the start of a comment line within a CNC program. The colon must be the first
character on the line.
Example:
: select absolute positioning
G90
: XY plane
G17
:Visible comments will be displayed on screen with the G-codes.

; - Internal Comment Identifier
The semicolon (;) is used to indicate the start of an internal comment within a CNC program line. All characters
after the semicolon are ignored when the program is run. Internal comments are used to document NC programs or
temporarily omit the remainder of a line.
Example:
G90 ; select absolute positioning
G17 ; XY plane
G1 X1 Y1 F10
G0 ; X0 Y0 ; G0 selected with no movement
[ ] – Numerical Expression
The left bracket ‘[‘ and right bracket ‘]’ are used to delimit a numerical expression. Numerical expressions can
contain floating-point numbers or user and system variables in combination with mathematical operators and
functions. The left parenthesis ‘(‘ or bracket ‘[‘ and right parenthesis ‘)’ or bracket ‘]’ can be used between the first
left bracket and last right bracket to force operator precedence or associatively. A bracketed numerical expression
can be used anywhere a number would be used. Comparison operators (‘eq’, ‘ne’, etc.) have built in rounding
specified by parameter 144. Without this rounding, ‘eq’ would usually return “false” when comparing two
numbers calculated in different ways. Comparison operators and logical operators (‘!’, ‘&&’, ‘||’) return 1.0 for
“true” and 0.0 for “false”.
The mathematical operators and functions are:
+ Addition (or unary positive) eq or == Equals

- Subtraction (or unary negative) ne or != Not equals
* Multiplication ge or >= Greater than or equals
/ Division gt or > Greater than
^ Exponentiation le or <= Less than or equals
mod, % Modulo lt or < Less than
abs Absolute value not or ! Logical not
sin Sine (degrees) && Logical and
cos Cosine (degrees) || Logical or
tan Tangent (degrees) and Bit-wise and
sqrt Square root xor Bit-wise exclusive or
# Variable access or Bit-wise or
~ Bit-wise complement
Examples:
G91 X[13/64] Z[1+3/8] ; move the X axis 13/64 (0.2031) units
; and the Z axis 1 3/8 (1.375) units incrementally
X[SQRT[ABS[SIN[#101]-COS[#102]]]] ; Move X as a function of #101 and #102
#, = - User or System Variable Assignment

The ‘#’ character is used to reference a macro or a user or system variable. For variables that can be written, the ‘=’
is used to assign to them.
Index Description Returns R/W

1-3 Macro arguments A-C The floating point value if R/W
4-6 Macro arguments I-K (1st set) defined by a G65 call, 0.0 R/W
7-9 Macro arguments D-F or 2nd set of I-K otherwise. R/W
10 3rd I (G is invalid) R/W
11 Macro argument H or 3rd J These can be used as private, R/W
12 3rd K (L is invalid) local variables in any program R/W
13 Macro argument M or 4th I or subprogram. (See R/W
examples.)
14 4th J (N is invalid) R/W
15 4th K (O is invalid) R/W
16 5th I (P is invalid) R/W
17-18 Macro argument Q-R or 5th J-K R/W
19-21 Macro arguments R-T or 6th set of I-K R/W
22-24 Macro arguments U-W or 7th set of I-K R/W
25-27 Macro arguments X-Z or 8th set of I-K R/W
28-30 9th set of I-K R/W
31-33 10th set of I-K R/W
Floating-point value.
100 - 149 User variables Initialized to 0.0 at start of job R/W
processing
150 – 159 Nonvolatile user variables Floating-point value saved in R/W
CNC10.JOB file.
2400, 2401-2418 Active WCS, WCS #1-18 CSR angles R/W
2500, 2501-2518 Active WCS, WCS #1-18 Axis 1 values (X) R/W
2600, 2601-2618 Active WCS, WCS #1-18 Axis 2 values (Y) R/W
2700, 2701-2718 Active WCS, WCS #1-18 Axis 3 values (Z) R/W
Floating point value
2800, 2801-2818 Active WCS, WCS #1-18 Axis 4 values (W) R/W
3901 Parts Cut (Part #) R/W
3902 Parts Required (Part Cnt) R/W
4001 Move mode 0.0 (rapid) or 1.0 (feed) R
4002 Constant surface speed mode (lathe only) 96.0 (on) 97.0 (off) R
4003 Positioning mode 90.0 (abs) or 91.0 (inc) R
4005 Feedrate mode (lathe only) 98.0 (units per min) or R
99.0 (units per rev)
4006 Units of measure 20.0 (imp) or 21.0 (metric) R
4014 WCS 54.0-71.0 (WCS#1-18) R
4109 Feedrate (F) R
4119 Spindle Speed (S) R
4120 Tool Number (T) R
4121 Mill: Current height offset number (H) R
Lathe: Current offset (“oo” in “Tttoo”)
4122 Current diameter offset number (D, mill only) R
4201 Job processing state 0 = normal, 1 = graph R
4202 Search mode (0 = search mode off) 0 = search mode off R
5021-5024 Machine Position (X=5021, Y=5022, etc.) R
5041-5044 Current Position (X=5041, Y=5042, etc.) R
6001-6080 PLC Inputs 1 - 80 R
6900-6909 PLC Inputs, eight at a time. R
Least significant bit is lowest
7001-6080 PLC Outputs 1 - 80 R
numbered PLC bit.
7900-7909 PLC Outputs, eight at a time. 0 = closed, 1 = open R
8001-6080 PLC Memory bits 1 - 80 R
8900-8909 PLC Memory bits, eight at a time. R
9000-9199 Parameter values 0 – 199 See Chapter 14. R

Index Description Returns R/W
10000 Mill: Height offset amount, active H Floating point value R/W
10001-10200 Mill: Height offset amount, H001 – H200 Floating point value R/W
11000 Mill: Diameter offset amount, active D Floating point value R/W
11001-11200 Mill: Diameter offset amount, D001 – D200 Floating point value R/W
12000 Mill: Tool H number, active tool (T) 0 - 200 R/W
12001-12200 Mill: Tool H number, tools 1 - 200 0 - 200 R/W
13000 Mill: Tool D number, active tool (T) 0 - 200 R/W
13001-13200 Mill: Tool D number, tools 1 - 200 0 - 200 R/W
14000 Mill: Tool coolant, active tool (T) 7, 8, 9 R/W
14001-14200 Mill: Tool coolant, tools 1 – 200 7, 8, 9 R/W
15000 Mill: Tool spindle direction, active tool (T) 3, 4, 5 R/W
15001-15200 Mill: Tool spindle direction, tools 1 - 200 3, 4, 5 R/W
16000 Mill: Tool spindle speed, active tool (T) Floating point value R/W
16001-16200 Mill: Tool spindle speed, tools 1 - 200 Floating point value R/W
17000 Mill: Tool bin number, active tool (T) Floating point value R/W
17001-17200 Mill: Tool bin number, tools 1 - 200 Floating point value R/W
18000 Mill: Tool putback, active tool (T) Floating point value R/W
18001-18200 Mill: Tool putback, tools 1 – 200 Floating point value R/W
24003 Z axis reference (machine position) Floating point value R
25010 Calculated spindle speed if P78 = 1.0 and a spindle Integer R
encoder is mounted.
29000-29999 User variables. These variables retain their values Floating point value R/W
until the CNC software is exited.
Examples:
#100 = #5041 ; set user variable #100 to the X axis current position
G90 X[#5041+1+7/32] ; move the X axis 1 7/32 units (1.2188) incrementally
#2501 = #5021 ; set WCS#1 X value to the current X position
#2703=[#2703+1/8] ; add 1/8 units (.125) to the WCS#3 Z value
; Subroutine parameter and local variable access.

G1 X#A Y#B Z#C F#F ; move to the coordinates passed as parameters
#[Q] = #F * .10 ; Assign local variable #Q to 10% of #F
#17 = #7 * .10 ; Same statement as previous using number references.
#[C] = 0.05 ; Reassign #C. (Value passed as parameter is lost.)

Advanced Macro Statements (Optional)
Warning: Branching and conditional execution are extremely powerful tools that, combined with access to system
variables, allow you to do many things that would otherwise be impossible. Nevertheless, using branching and
conditional execution can introduce undesirable and even unpredictable behavior into your programs. Undesirable
effects can occur simply by graphing a program. The least of these undesirable effects could be entering an endless
loop, failing to draw anything, or wiping out all the information in your tool library or WCS settings. It is your
responsibility to make sure that undesirable things do not happen in your programs. You must monitor the job
processing and search modes in your program, if necessary, and take appropriate action. Until you are confident of
the actions of your program, you should step through it one block at a time to confirm your program logic.
GOTO - Branch Execution

To branch to another line within the same program or subprogram, use the statement:
GOTO <expression>
where <expression> is any expression that evaluates to a valid block number in the program. GOTO causes an
immediate branch to the specified destination. Program codes preceding a GOTO on the same line will be
executed normally. Any program codes following GOTO on the same line will cause an error.
If fast branching is disabled (parameter 145 = 0) then CNC10 searches forward in the program for the first
matching block number and resumes searching, if necessary from the top of the program. For this reason when fast
branching is disabled, backward branches take longer than forward branches and backward branch times depend on
the total program size. If the program is sufficiently large, use of the GOTO statement could introduce temporary
pauses.
When fast branching is enabled (parameter 145 = 1) then CNC10 remembers the locations of block numbers as it
finds them during program execution. Backward branches always take place immediately. The first forward
branch to a block not yet encountered will take additional time as CNC10 searches forward for the block number;
however, subsequent forward branches to that block number will take place immediately. The trade-off for using
fast branching is that all line numbers at a given level of program or subprogram must be unique and programs will
use more memory (approximately 16kilobytes of memory for every 1000 block numbers in the program.)
IF THEN ELSE - Conditional Execution

Program symbols, G codes, M codes and GOTO commands may be executed conditionally using the IF statement.
The general form of the IF statement is:
IF <expression> THEN <execute if true> ELSE <execute if false>
where <expression> is any valid expression, <execute if true> is one or more program codes to execute if
<expression> evaluates to “true” (non-zero) and <execute if false> is one or more program codes to execute if
<expression> evaluates to “false” (zero). All parts of the IF statement must appear on the same line. The
“ELSE <execute if false>” part of the statement is optional and may be omitted. The “THEN” may be
omitted; however, <expression> must be enclosed in brackets ([]). The IF statement may follow other
program codes on the same line. Compound conditionals are possible but they cannot be nested. The first
THEN always pairs with the first IF. ELSE always pairs with the first <expression> that evaluates to “false”.
All program codes executed are executed as part of the same block.

Examples:
; Branch to N200 if machine position is okay, otherwise go to N300

N100 IF #5041 LE 5.0 THEN GOTO 200 ELSE GOTO 300
; Force subprogram parameter #D to be within range.
IF [#D LE 0.005] #[D] = 0.005
; Compound conditionals
IF [#A LE 0.0] GOTO 100 ELSE IF [#A LE 2.5] GOTO 200 ELSE GOTO 300
IF [#A GT 0.0] IF [#D/#A GE 0.0] #[C] = SQRT[#D/#A]
INPUT – Prompt Operator for Input

The INPUT macro prompts the operator for numeric input. The general form of the INPUT statement is:
INPUT “<prompt>” <variable>
Where <prompt> is the message prompt for the operator and <variable> is the variable in which to store the input.
CNC10 will display a dialog with the given prompt and space for the operator response. The operator may enter
any numeric expression (see above) including variables as a response. The operator must press CYCLE START
or Alt-S to dismiss the dialog. Pressing ESC will cancel the job.
CNC10 parses well ahead of the current execution to maximize throughput and efficiency. For this reason, an
INPUT macro may prompt the operator for input immediately even though the INPUT macro is located in the
middle or near the end of the job. Parsing pauses while the dialog is displayed. Any statements parsed prior to the
INPUT macro will have been queued and will continue to execute in the background while the prompt is displayed.
Job processing will pause only if all queued statements have been executed before the operator supplies a response.
INPUT macros will not graph. If you must graph the job, first set the input variable to a default value and use a
conditional to execute the INPUT only if the job is being run normally.
Use search mode cautiously with INPUT macros. To have search work properly, you may have to supply exactly
the same input during the search as you did during the last actual run.
Examples:
; Ask operator for pocket depth. Store result in #101

; Note: this will not graph.
INPUT “Enter pocket depth” #101
; Allow job with INPUT statements to be graphed.

#101 = 0.5 ; Supply a default value for graphing
; Ask for operator input only if not graphing.
IF NOT #4201 THEN INPUT “Enter pocket depth” #101

Chapter 12
CNC Program Codes: G-codes
G-code Group Description
G00 *A Rapid Positioning
G01 A Linear Interpolation
G02 A Circular or Helical Interpolation CW
G03 A Circular or Helical Interpolation CCW
G04 B Dwell
G09 B Exact Stop
G10 B Parameter Setting
G17 *C Circular Interpolation Plane Selection XY
G18 C Circular Interpolation Plane Selection ZX
G19 C Circular Interpolation Plane Selection YZ
G20 *K Select Inch Units
G21 L Select Metric Units
G22 O Work envelope on
G23 *O Work envelope off
G28 B Return to Reference Point
G29 B Return from Reference Point
G30 B Return to Secondary Reference Point
G40 *D Cutter Compensation Cancel
G41 D Cutter Compensation Left
G42 D Cutter Compensation Right
G43 E Tool Length Compensation (+)
G44 E Tool Length Compensation (-)
G49 *E Tool Length Compensation Cancel
G50 *M Scaling/Mirroring Off (Optional)
G51 M Scaling/Mirroring On (Optional)
G52 B Offset Local Coordinate System Origin (Optional)
G53 B Rapid Position in Machine Coordinates (Optional)
G54 L Select Work Coordinate System #1 (Optional)
G61 F Exact Stop Mode
G64 *F Cutting Mode
G65 J Call Macro (Optional)
G68 N Coordinate Rotation on
G69 *N Coordinate Rotation off
G73 G High Speed Peck Drilling
G74 G Counter Tapping (Optional)
G80 *G Canned Cycle Cancel
G81 G Drilling and Spot Drilling
G82 G Drill with Dwell
G83 G Deep Hole Drilling
G84 G Tapping (Optional)
G85 G Boring
G89 G Boring with Dwell
G90 *H Absolute Positioning Mode
G91 H Incremental positioning Mode
G92 B Set Absolute position
G98 *I Initial Point Return
G99 I R Point Return
G117 *C Rotation of Plane Selection XY
G118 C Rotation of Plane Selection ZX
G119 C Rotation of Plane Selection YZ
NOTES:
- All the default G-codes have been marked with the symbol " * ".
- A given line of a program may contain more than one G-code.
- If several G-codes from one group are used in the same line, only the G-code specified last will remain active.
- G-codes from group B are of "one shot" type (active only in the line in which they are specified). All other G-
codes are modal (active until another G-code of the same group is specified).
- If a G-code from group A is used in a canned cycle mode, the canned cycle will be canceled. Canned cycle G-
codes, however, have no effect on G-codes from group A.
G00 - Rapid Positioning

G0 moves to the specified position at the maximum motor rate. The coordinates may be either
absolute positions (G90) or incremental positions (G91). G0 is modal and remains in effect
until another positioning mode (G1, G2, G3 etc.) is commanded. G0 is the default-positioning
mode.
When the Z axis is commanded to move in the + direction, the Z axis will move up to its new position first, then the
other axes will move to their new position along a straight line.
When the Z axis is commanded to move in the - direction, all axes but the Z axis will move to their new position
along a straight line, then the Z axis will move down to its new position.
Example:
G0 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 ;Rapid move to X0, Y0, Z0
* NOTE: G0 moves are only affected by the feedrate override knob if rapid override is ON.
G01 - Linear Interpolation

G1 moves to the specified position at the programmed feedrate. The coordinates may be either
absolute positions (G90) or incremental positions (G91). The movement will be along a
straight line. G1 is modal and remains in effect until another positioning mode (G0, G2, G3
etc.) is commanded.
Example:
G01 X2 Y3 Z4 W5 F10 ;Linear move to X2, Y3, Z4, W5 at a 10in/min
G91 X6 Y7 ;Linear move to X8, Y10
Z3 W4 F20 ;Linear move to Z7, W9 at 20in/min (G91 is modal)
G02 & G03 - Circular Or Helical Interpolation
G2 moves in a clockwise circular motion, and G3 moves in a counterclockwise circular motion. This clockwise
and counterclockwise motion is relative to your point of view, however. See the diagram below. The X, Y or Z
position specified in the G2 or G3 command is the end position of the arc, and may be an absolute position (G90) or
an incremental position (G91). G2 and G3 are modal and remain in effect until another positioning mode (G0, G1,
etc.) is commanded.
* NOTE: When using G18, the G2 command moves in a counterclockwise direction in the XZ plane.
The axes included in the currently selected circular plane (G17, G18, or G19) will move in a circular motion. Any
other axes specified will move along a straight line (helical movement). The programmed feedrate is used for the
interpolated motion along the movement of all axes.
Helical and circular motion can be programmed in two different ways: specifying the final point and the radius of
the arc, or specifying the final point and the parameters I, J, K (center point of the arc as incremental values from
the start position).
* NOTE: For closed circles (arc of 360 degrees), use method 2: specify final point and parameters I, J and K.
Method 1 (specify final point and radius) will not work.
METHOD 1: USING FINAL POINT AND RADIUS
The commands G2 and G3 will have the following structure:
G2 Xa Yb Zc Rd
G3 Xa Yb Zc Rd
where a, b, and c will be the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the final point of the arc, and d will be the radius.
In most cases there will be two possible arcs of the same radius connecting two given points. This occurs because
the center of the arc is not specified. To choose the bigger arc, make the radius negative. To choose the smaller arc,
make the radius positive. See examples 1 and 2 for graphical explanations of this concept.

Example 1 (small arc solution: positive radius):
G17 G90 F25 ;selects XY plane and absolute positioning

G00 X1.0 Y1.0 Z0 ;rapid to start position X1, Y1, Z0
G02 X2 Y2 Z0 R1 ;arc to X2 Y2 Z0 with radius of 1
;(small arc solution)
Example 2 (big arc solution: negative radius):

G02 X2 Y2 Z0 R -1 ;arc to X2 Y2 Z0 with radius of 1
;(big arc solution)
METHOD 2: USING FINAL POINT AND PARAMETERS I, J, K
Another way to specify a helical or circular operation is using the parameters I, J, K instead of the radius R. The
parameters I, J, and K are the incremental distances from the start point to the center of the arc.
I = X center - X start (valid for G17 & G18)

J = Y center - Y start (valid for G17 & G19)
K = Z center - Z start (valid for G18 & G19)
Examples:
Circular motion (See graph in method 1, example 2)

G02 X2 Y2 Z0 J1 ;arc to X2 Y2 Z0 with radius of 1

Helical motion
G17 G90 F30 ;select XY plane and absolute positioning

G00 X3.0 Y2.0 Z1.0 ;rapid to start position X3, Y2, Z1
G02 X2.0 Y1.0 I-1.0 J0.0 Z0.0 ;CW XY arc from X3,Y2 to X2,Y1.
;Center at X2, Y2
;Helical Z move from 1 to 0
G04 - Dwell
G4 causes motion to stop for the specified time. The P parameter is used to specify
the time in seconds to delay. G4 causes the block to decelerate to a full stop.
The minimum delay is 0.01 seconds and the maximum is 327.67 seconds. The dwell time is performed after all
motion is stopped and M functions on the line are completed. If the P parameter is not specified, X will be used
instead. If neither P nor X is specified, the default dwell time of 0.01 seconds will be used.
Example:
G0 X1 Y1 ;rapid to X1, Y1
G4 P2.51 ;pause for 2.51 seconds
G1 X2 Y2 ;Linear move to X2, Y2
G09 - Exact stop

G9 causes motion to decelerate to a stop. G9 is equivalent to G4 P0.01. G9 is not modal;
it is only effective for the block in which it appears. See G61 (exact stop mode).
Example:
G9 G0 X1 Y1 ;rapid to X1 Y1 and stop
X2 Y2 ;continue to X2 Y2
G10 - Parameter Setting

G10 allows you to set parameters for different program operations.
Examples:
G10 P73 R.05 ;Sets the peck drilling retract amount to .05
G10 P83 R.05 ;Sets the deep drill rapid down clearance to .05
G10 P81 R15 ;sets G81 to use M15 instead of Z movement
G10 H5 R-1.3 ;Sets tool length offset #5 to -1.3 in the offset lib.
G10 D3 R.25 ;Sets tool diameter offset #3 to .25 in the offset lib.

G17, G18, G19 - Circular Interpolation Plane Selection
G17, G18, and G19 select the plane for circular interpolation commands (G02 & G03). G17 is the default plane.
See figure under G2 and G3.
G17 is the XY plane

G18 is the ZX plane
G19 is the YZ plane
G20 - Select Inch Units
G20 selects inch units, affecting the interpretation of all subsequent dimensions and feedrates in the job file. G20
does not change the native machine units as set on the control setup menu.
G21 - Select Metric Units

G21 selects metric units, affecting the interpretation of all subsequent dimensions and feedrates in the job file. G21
does not change the native machine units, as set on the control setup menu.
G22/G23 – Work Envelope On/Off

G22 turns on programmable work envelope in machine coordinates. When the machine tries to move into the
forbidden area, let’s say the x-axis, an “x-axis work envelope exceeded” message is displayed, letting you know
which line of the program is at fault. The work envelope is set with the X, Y, Z for the ‘+’ limit and I, J, K for the
‘–‘ limit. G22 is modal and remains on until turned off by G23 or the end of the job. The limits entered in the X,
Y, Z and I, J, K parameters are stored in the WCS menu under F3 - Work Envel. For more information see chapter
4.
Example: (Machine homes to the X + switch and has 0 to –40 inches of travel in the X axis,)
G22 X-8 I-32 ;Keeps programs from moving into the outside 8 inches of
;X axis of travel
G1 X-13 F20 ;Would generate a “X axis work envelope exceeded, line 3”
;message
G23 ;Allows travel into G22 forbidden area.
M25 ;Z home
G0 X-13 ;Ok to move X here now
G28 - Return to Reference Point

G28 moves to the first reference point, by way of an intermediate point. The location of the reference point, in
machine coordinates, may be set in Work Coordinate System Configuration. The intermediate point is specified in
the local coordinate system, and may be at the current location (resulting in a move directly to the reference point).
If an intermediate point is specified, only those axes for which positions are specified will be moved. If no axes are
specified, all axes will be moved. The location of the intermediate point is stored for later use with G29.

Examples:
G28 G91 Z0 ;move Z axis directly to reference point

;(X and Y don't move)
G28 G91 X-.5 Y0 Z0 ;move X -0.5 (from current position), then move all
;three axes to reference point
G28 G90 X2 Y4 Z.1 ;move all axes to (X2, Y4, Z0.1), then to
;reference point
G28 ;move all axes to the reference point
;(no intermediate point)
* NOTE: As with G0 positioning moves, the Z-axis will move separately. If Z is moving up (the usual case) Z will
move first, then the other axes. If Z is moving down, the other axes will move first, then Z. Because of this, it is
rarely necessary to specify an intermediate point different from the current position.
G29 - Return from Reference Point
G29 moves all axes to the intermediate point stored in a preceding G28 or G30 command. It may be used to return
to the workpiece. If a position is specified, the machine will move to that position (in local coordinates) after
reaching the intermediate point. G29 may only be specified after G28 or G30, though there may be intervening
moves.
Examples:
G29 ;move all axes back from reference point to intermediate

;point
G29 X1 Y2 ;move all axes to intermediate point, then move to X1 Y2
* NOTE: As with G0 positioning moves, the Z-axis will move separately. If Z is moving up, Z will move first,
then the other axes. If Z is moving down (the usual case for G29), the other axes will move first, then Z.
G30 - Return to Secondary Reference Point

G30 functions exactly like G28, except that by default it uses the second reference point from the Work Coordinate
System Configuration table, and the P parameter may be used to request either reference point.
Examples:
G30 G91 Z0 ;move Z axis directly to second reference point
G30 P1 ;move all axes to first reference point
NOTE: G30 P1 is equivalent to G28.
G40, G41, G42 -Cutter Compensation

G41 and G42 in conjunction with the selected tool diameter (D code) apply cutter compensation to the programmed
toolpath.
G41 offsets the cutter tool one half of the tool diameter selected with a D code, to the left of the workpiece, relative
to the direction of travel.
G42 offsets the cutter tool one half of the tool diameter selected with a D code, to the right of the workpiece,
relative to the direction of travel.
G40 cancels G41 and G42.

Example:
G41 D03 ;Tells the machine to compensate left half of the
;diameter of the amount that corresponds to D03 in the
;Tool Library
Whenever cutter compensation is applied, the following factors must be taken into account in order to obtain proper
results.
1. The cutter diameter compensation function (G41, G42) must be implemented before the cutter tool reaches the
starting cutting point.
Example 1:
G0X0Y0 ;Rapid tool to X0, Y0

G42 D3 ;Turn cutter compensation on, with a diameter of D3
G0X.5Y2 ;Rapid to X0.5, Y2
G1x4.1Y2 ;Linear cut to X4.1, Y2.
;Cut to X4.1 to clear material.
G40 ;Turn cutter compensation off.
G0X5Y0 ;Rapid to X5, Y0.
You may want to add .1 or .05 inches on the final position for the last cut to clear the material.
NOTE: The diameter compensation statement G42 is placed before G0 X.5 Y2. As a result, the compensation is
applied before the cutter reaches the starting cutting point X.5 Y2.

2. If the cutter is down, then the cutter compensation lead-in must always come from an appropriate direction.
Otherwise, the workpiece will be incorrectly cut, and the cutter tool could be damaged. One way to avoid this
problem is by always keeping the cutter above the workpiece whenever a transition is being made to a new starting
cutting point. If for some reason this was not possible, then the G-code program should be written so that the cutter
compensation lead-in paths do not interfere with the space occupied by the workpiece. Example 2 illustrates a
possible harmful outcome of programming an inappropriate lead-in direction.
Example 2:
G0 X0Y0 ;Rapid tool to X0, Y0

G42 D5 ;Turn cutter compensation on, with a diameter of D5
G1 X.75Y-1 F5 ;Linear move to X0.75, Y-1. (notice this damages the
;corner of the work piece)
X3.6 ;move X to 3.6
G0 X4Y-2 ;Rapid to X4, Y-2
* NOTE: This problem could have been avoided by selecting a transitional point between X0 Y0 and X.75 Y-1. A
transitional point such as X-1 Y-1 would properly modify the lead-in path, keeping the cutter from damaging the
corner of the workpiece. Example 3 shows the correct way of performing this operation.

Example 3:
G0X0Y0 ;Rapid tool to X0, Y0

G42D5 ;Turn cutter compensation on, with a diameter of D5
G0X0Y-1 ;Rapid tool to X0, Y-1
G1X.75Y-1 ;Linear cut to X0.75, Y-1.
X3.6 ;move X to 3.6
3. Lookahead. When the control machines any rapid traverse (G0), line (G1), or arc (G2, G3) with tool diameter
compensation enabled, the program will look up to 10 consecutive events ahead of the current event in order to
anticipate toolpath clearance problems. Lookahead ensures that compensated tool paths don't overlap in
programmed part sections where there is not enough clearance for the tool. The figure below shows a
compensated tool path, and the actual toolpath after Lookahead corrects the clearance problem:
The number of Lookahead events the control scans is preset to 10. You can change the number of consecutive
events from 1 to 10 by changing parameter 99 (refer to Chapter 14 for more information).
G43, G44, G49 - Tool Length Compensation

G43 and G44 apply tool length compensation to a selected tool to allow the control to utilize multiple tools in a
single CNC program.
G43 applies positive compensation (from Z zero up). Work from part surface up.
G44 applies negative compensation (from Z zero down), used only when there is an absolute machine home. The
spindle face is considered a zero length tool and all offsets are from there down.
G49 cancels tool length compensation (also canceled by issuing G43 H00).

Example:
G43 H01 ;tells the machine to offset the amount that
;corresponds to H01 in the Offset Library
G50, G51 - Scaling / Mirroring (Optional)

G50 and G51 scales program G-codes relative to a scaling center point defined as position (X, Y, Z).
A G51 applies scaling/mirror to all positions, lines, and arcs following this G-code until a G50 is entered. Specify
scaling factors with a value I, J, K. The X, Y, and Z parameters are the coordinates of the scaling center. If the
scaling center is not specified, the default scaling center is the current cutter position as shown on the DRO. To
mirror, enter a negative value for the scaling factor.
Example, Scaling:
G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I3.0 J2 K1 ;turn scaling on

G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z1.0 ;rapid to X0, Y0, Z1
G01 X1.0 Y0.0 Z1.0 ;line to X1, Y0, Z1
G01 X1.0 Y1.0 Z1.0 ;line to X1, Y1, Z1
G01 X0.0 Y1.0 Z1.0 ;line to X0, Y1, Z1
G01 X0.0 Y0.0 Z1.0 ;line to X0, Y0, Z1
G01 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 ;line to X0, Y0, Z0
G50 ;cancel scale
For this G51, the following program lines were scaled 3:1 in the X direction, 2:1 in the Y direction, and 1:1 in the Z
direction. If no scale factor is specified, the default is 1:1 for all axes.
Example, Mirroring:
G51 X-0.5 Y0.0 Z.0 I-1 J1 K1 ;turn mirror on (x axis -0.5 mirror line)
G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z1.0 ;rapid traverse to X0, Y0, Z1
G01 X1.0 Y0.5 Z1.0 ;line to X1, Y.5, Z1
G01 X0.0 Y1.0 Z1.0 ;line to X0, Y1, Z1
G01 X0.0 Y0.0 Z1.0 ;line to X0, Y0, Z1
G50 ;cancel mirror

If scaling factors are the same for all the axes, parameter P can be used.
Example:
G51 X1.0 Y2.0 Z0.0 P2.5 ;scale all axes a factor of 2.5.
If an arc is scaled with uneven scaling factors, the result will depend on how the arc center and radius were
specified:
1. If the arc radius was specified with R, the radius will be scaled by the larger of the two circular plane scale
factors. The result will be a circular arc between the scaled arc start and the scaled arc end.
2. If the arc center was specified with I, J, and/or K, the centers will be scaled by the appropriate axis scale factors.
The result will be a circular arc from the scaled arc start, around the scaled center, and usually with a line from the
end of the circular arc to the scaled arc end.
3.In no case can an ellipse be generated using scaling.
G52 - Offset Local Coordinate System (Optional)

G52 shifts the local coordinate system origin by a specified distance. Multiple G52 codes are not cumulative;
subsequent shifts replace earlier ones. The G52 shift may therefore be canceled by specifying a shift of zero. If
you are using multiple coordinate systems, the G52 shift amount will affect all coordinate systems.
Example:
G0 X0 Y0 ;move to origin
M98 P9100 ;call subprogram
G52 Y4 ;shift coordinate system 4 inches in Y
G0 X0 Y0 ;move to new origin
M98 P9100 ;call subprogram again with new coordinates
G52 Y0 ;restore unshifted coordinate system
G53 - Rapid Positioning in Machine Coordinates (Optional)

G53 is a one shot code that performs a rapid traverse using machine coordinates. It does not affect the current
movement mode (G0-G3) or coordinate system (G54-G59). G53 may only be used with absolute positioning
(G90).
Example:
G53 X15 Y4 Z0 ; move to 15,4,0 in machine coordinates
G54 - G59 - Select Work Coordinate System (Optional)

G54 through G59 select among the six work coordinate systems. Subsequent absolute positions will be interpreted
in the new coordinate system.

Example:
G54 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 ;select first WCS, move to origin

G2 X1 I.5 Z-.5 ;mill something...
G0 Z.1 ;Rapid to position Z0.1
G55 X1 Y1 ;select second WCS, move to X1, Y1
Using Extended Work Coordinate Systems: There are actually a total of 18 work piece origins. They can be set
using Set Part 0/Position or in the WCS Table. In G-codes, the 12 additional work piece origins may be selected
with either “G54 P1” (WCS # 7) through “G54 P12” (WCS #18) or “E7” through “E18.”
G61 - Exact stop mode

G61 invokes the exact stop mode. This forces deceleration to an exact stop at the end of each
block (equivalent to G9 in each block). G61 is modal and remains in effect until canceled with
G64 (cutting mode).
Example:
G61 X2 ;exact stop mode on: decel to stop at X2
X4 ;move to X4 and stop
X5 ;move to X5 and stop
G64 - Cutting mode (continuous, without exact stop)

G64 invokes cutting mode and cancels exact stop mode. No exact stops are performed at
the end of each block. However, acceleration and deceleration is still performed. G64 is
modal and remains in effect until exact stop mode (G61) is selected. Cutting mode is the
default at the start of each program.
Example:
G64 X2 ;exact stop mode off: no stop at X2
X4 ;continue to X4 without stop
X5 ;continue to X5 without stop

65 - Call Macro (Optional)
G65 calls a macro with user-specified values. A macro is a subprogram that executes a certain operation (e.g. drill
pattern, contours, etc.) with values assigned to variable parameters within the operation.
Calling methods:
G65 Pxxxx Lrrrr Arguments
or
G65 "program.CNC" Lrrrr Arguments
Where xxxx is the macro number (in file Oxxxx.CNC, 0000-9999 allowed, leading zeros required in filename), rrrr
is the repeat value, "program.CNC" is the name of the macro file, and Arguments is a list of variable identifiers and
values.
Arguments to macro calls are specified by using letters A-Z, excluding G, L, N, O, and P.
Macros are written just like normal programs. However, macro programs may access their arguments by using #A,
#B, etc., or by using numbers: #1 for A, #2 for B, etc. (exceptions: #4-6 for I-K, #7-11 for D-H). Arguments I, J,
and K can be used more than once in a macro call, with the first set of values stored as #4-6, the second as #7-9,
etc., to a maximum of 10 sets.
* See example at the end of this G65 section.
A macro can use the negative of an argument by placing a minus sign before the '#'. No other arithmetic operations
are supported. Macros can call other macros (up to 4 levels of depth), Macro M-functions, and subprograms. Macro
M-functions and subprograms can similarly call macros.
Macros 9100 - 9999 may be embedded into a main program, using 091xx to designate the beginning of the macro
and M99 to end it. CNC10 will read the macro and generate a file 091xx.CNC, but will not execute the macro. It
will be executed when G65 is issued.
Example 1:
Main program:
G65 "TEST.CNC" A5 B3 X4
Macro TEST.CNC:
G1 X#X Y#A Z-#B
This call will produce

G1 X4 Y5 Z-3
Example 2:
Main program:
G65 "TEST2.CNC" I5 J3 K40 I-1 J2 I0 J0
Macro TEST2.CNC:
G1 X#4 Y#5 F#6
G1 X#7 Y#8 F#9
G1 X#10 Y#11 F#12
This call will produce

G1 X5 Y3 F40
G1 X-1 Y2
G1 X0 Y0
Example 3:
Suppose a piece is to have notches of different lengths and depths along the x-axis:
The macro variables would handle the length in the Y direction and depth in the Z direction:
O0002
G90 G1 Z0 F30 ;Linear move to Z0
Z#Z F5 ;Cut to variable depth
G91Y#Y F10 ;Cut variable length
G90 G0 Z0.1 ;Retract
The main program would call this macro five times, each time specifying the depth and length required.
:Main Program
G90 G0 X1 Y1 Z0.1 ;Move to first notch
G65 P0002 L1 Y1 Z.25 ;Call macro and assign Y=1" and Z=.25"
G90 G0 X2.5 Y1 ;Move to second notch
G65 P0002 L1 Y1.5 Z.5 ;Call macro and assign Y=1.5" and Z=.5"
G90 G0 X4 Y1 ;Move to third notch
G65 P0002 L1 Y2 Z.25 ;Call macro again
G90 G0 X5.5 Y1 ;Move to fourth notch
G65 P0002 L1 Y1.5 Z.5 ;Call macro again
G90 G0 X7 Y1 ;Move to fifth notch
G65 P0002 L1 Y1 Z.25 ;Call macro again
:End program
G68, G69 - Coordinate Rotation on/off

G68 rotates program G-codes a specified angle R. G68 rotates all positions, lines, and arcs until a G69 is entered.
The center of rotation can be specified by X, Y and Z values (X, Y for G17 plane). If the center is not specified
then a default center of rotation is used as determined by machine parameter #2 (see Chapter 14 for parameter #2).
The default plane of rotation is G17 (X, Y).

Example:
G68 R45 X4 Y2 ;Rotate 45 degrees centered on X4 Y2

G0 X3.0 Y1.0 ;Rapid to position
G1 X5.0 Y1.0 F20 ;Start part profile
X5.0 Y3.0
X4.125 Y3.0
G3 X4.0 Y2.875 J-0.125
G1 X4.0 Y2.125
G2 X3.875 Y2.0 I-0.125
G1 X3.125 Y2.0
G3 X3.0 Y1.875 J-0.125
G1 X3.0 Y1.0 ;End part profile
G69 ;Rotate Off
G73, G80, G81, G82, G83, G85, G89 - Canned Drilling Cycles
G74, G84 - Canned Tapping Cycles
G code -Z direction (machine hole) Operation at bottom +Z direction Use
of hole
G73 Intermittent Feed (Set with the Q Rapid traverse High speed peck
parameter) ---------- drilling cycle
G74 Feed Spindle CW, then Dwell Feed Counter tapping (Left-
(Set with the P parameter) hand thread)
parameter)
G80 ---------- ---------- ---------- Cancels canned cycles
G81 Feed ---------- Rapid traverse Regular and spot
drilling cycles and air
drill cycle
G82 Feed Dwell (Set with the P Rapid traverse Regular and counter
parameter) boring cycles, spot
facing
G83 Intermittent Feed (Set with the Q ---------- Rapid traverse Peck and deep hole
parameter) drilling cycles
G84 Feed Spindle CCW, then Dwell Feed Tapping (Right-hand
(Set with the P parameter) thread)
G85 Feed ---------- Feed Boring cycle
G89 Feed Dwell (Set with the P Feed Boring cycle
parameter)

Table 1. Canned drilling and tapping cycles
Canned Cycle Operation
Operation 1: Position the X, Y axes.

Operation 2: Rapid traverse to the position labeled R.
Operation 3: Machine hole.
Operation 4: Bottom hole operation.
Operation 5: Return to point R.
Operation 6: Rapid traverse to initial point.
Canned cycle G-code syntax
(Cycle codes do not have to be on the same line)
G ____ Canned cycle G-code from table 1.
X ____ X position of the hole to be drilled.
Y ____ Y position of the hole to be drilled.
Z ____ Specifies point Z in figure 1.

In incremental mode Z is measured from point R.
In absolute mode Z is the position of the hole bottom.
R ____ Specifies the distance to point R (figure 1) with an absolute or incremental value.
Q ____ Determines the cut-in depth for the G73 and G83 cycles.
Determines the thread lead for G74 and G84 if Rigid Tapping is enabled.
(In the case of Rigid Tapping Q is not modal)

P ____ Sets the dwell time at the bottom of the holes for G74, G82, G84, and G89 cycles. The dwell time is
measured in seconds (same as G04).
F ____ Sets the feed rate. Remains the feedrate even after G80 (cancel canned cycles).
K ____ Sets the number of repeats for drilling cycles. Operations 1 through 6 of figure 1 will be repeated K
number of times. If K is not specified K = 1. K is only useful when using incremental positioning
mode (G91) and is not retained from cycle to cycle. In absolute mode, K causes the drilling of the
same hole in the same position K times.
* NOTE: Canned cycles are modal and should be canceled with G80. However G00, G01, G02 and G03 will also
cause the cancellation of canned cycles. All parameters are stored until canned cycles are canceled except for the
hole position and K, which must be set each time the cycle is used. When G80 is issued the movement mode will
be the last one issued (G0, G1, G2, G3). Canned cycles will not be performed unless X and/or Y is specified.
When performing canned cycle operations, the distances can be either incremental or absolute, depending on the
current active mode (G90 = absolute, G91= incremental). Figure 2 illustrates canned cycle Z-axis distances in both
modes.
Figure 2: Canned Cycle Absolute and Incremental modes
* NOTE: In incremental mode the Z depth of the hole is measured from R, and R is measured from the initial tool
position.
Example:
(Part surface height is Z = 0, initial tool position is X.50 Y1.0 Z.625. Drill 0.50 deep hole at X1.0 Y1.0; clearance
height (R) is 0.10 above surface.)
Absolute Incremental
G90 G91
G81 X1 Y1 R.1 Z-.5 G81 X.5 Y0 R-.525 Z-.6
G80 G80

G73 - High Speed Peck Drilling
G73 is the peck drilling cycle. The hole is drilled in a series of moves: down a distance Q at a given feedrate, up
the retract distance at the rapid rate, and then down again at the given feedrate. The retract amount is set with G10
as shown in the example below.
Example:
G90 ;Absolute positioning
G01 X3.00 Y1.50 Z.5 ;G01 mode before canned cycle
G98 ;Set for initial point return
G10 P73 R.1 ;Sets the retract amount to .1
G73 X3.250 Y1.75 Z-.650 R.1 Q0.325 F3 ;Peck drill at X3.25 Y1.75
X4.5 Y3.5 ;Peck drill at X4.5 Y3.5
G80 ;Cancel canned cycle, return
;to G01

G74 - Counter Tapping (Optional)
G74 performs left-hand tapping using a floating tap head. The spindle speed and feedrate should be set and the
spindle started in the CCW direction before issuing G74. By default, G74 uses M3 to select spindle CW (at the
bottom of the hole) and M4 to re-select spindle CCW (after backing out of the hole). Alternate M functions may be
specified by setting parameters G74 (for CCW) and G84 (for CW).
The tap will continue to cut a short distance beyond the programmed Z height as the spindle comes to a stop before
reversing. When tapping blind holes, be sure to specify a Z height slightly above the bottom of the hole to prevent
the tool from reaching bottom before the spindle stops. The exact distance you must allow will depend on your
machine and the diameter and pitch of the tapping tool.
Note: If rigid tapping is enabled, a Q may be used to set the thread lead or pitch. However, because Q is not modal
in the case of Rigid Tapping, you must specify Q on every line at which Rigid Tapping is to occur.
* WARNING: Do not press FEED HOLD or CYCLE CANCEL while the tap is in the hole.
Example:
M4 S500 F27.78 ;start spindle CCW, set up for 18 pitch tap
G74 X1 Y1 R.1 Z-.5 ;counter-tap a 0.5 deep hole at X1 Y1
Y1.5 ; ... and another one at X1 Y1.5
G80 ;cancel canned cycles

G81 - Drilling and Spot Drilling
G81 is a general purpose drilling cycle. The hole is drilled in a single feedrate move, and then the tool is retracted
at the rapid rate.
Example:
G90 ;Absolute positioning
G01 X3.00 Y1.50 Z.5 ;G01 mode before canned cycle
G99 ;Set for R point return
G81 X3.250 Y1.75 Z-.650 R.1 F3 ;Drill at X3.25 Y1.75
X4.5 Y3.5 ;Drill at X4.5 Y3.5
G80 ;Cancel canned cycle, return to G1
G81 - Drill Cycle Transformation to G81 Air Drill Cycle

G81 may be modified to execute an M function instead of moving the Z-axis by setting parameter #81 to the
desired M function. Example use is for air-actuated drills.
Example: Execute M39 each time a new G81 position is given:
G10 P81 R39 ;Set parameter 81 to 39 (G81 air drill with M39)
G81 X5 ;Move to X5 and execute M39
Y3 ;Move to Y3 and execute M39
To revert to Z-axis drilling, specify M function #-1.
Example:
G10 P81 R-1 ;Set parameter 81 to -1 (G81 drilling cycle)
M function #39 is designed for general air drill use. See the description of M39 in the M functions section.
A different M function may be used instead, but any M function used must be a macro file that uses the M103 and
M104 commands to time the cycle (see the example in the M function section under M103). If the macro file does
not use M103, the control will automatically cancel the job 1/2 second after starting G81. For information on
creating customized M functions, review Macro M functions in Chapter 12.

The M39 default air drill cycle has a time out of 2.0 seconds. As a result, if the cycle does not complete within 2
seconds then the cycle aborts and the output relay is turned off under PLC program control.
* NOTE: The PLC program must be involved in the execution of the cycle. The PLC program is responsible for
turning on relays based on M function requests and the status of program execution. The PLC program must also
stop all programmed machine functions when the program is canceled. See the M39 description (Chapter 13) for a
sample of an air drill cycle M function.
G82 - Drill with dwell
G82 is a general purpose drilling cycle similar to G81. However, G82 includes an optional dwell at the bottom of
the hole before retracting the tool. This can make the depth of blind holes more accurate.
Example:
G82 X1 Y1 R.1 Z-.5 P.5 ;drill to Z-.5, dwell .5 seconds

G83 - Deep hole drilling
G83 is a deep hole drilling cycle. It periodically retracts the tool to the surface to clear accumulated chips, then
returns to resume drilling where it left off. The retract and return are performed at the rapid rate. Because there
may be chips in the bottom of the hole, the tool does not return all the way to the bottom at the rapid rate. Instead it
slows to feedrate a short distance above the bottom. This clearance distance is selected by setting Parameter 83
with G10 (see example below).
Example:
G10 P83 R.05 ;set clearance to .05"
G83 X0 Y0 R.1 Z-2 Q.5 ;drill 2" deep hole in 0.5" steps
G80 ;cancel canned cycle
G84 - Tapping (Optional)
G84 performs right-hand tapping using a floating tap head. The spindle speed and feedrate should be set and the
spindle started in the CW direction before issuing G84. By default G84 uses M4 to select spindle CCW (at the
bottom of the hole) and M3 to re-select spindle CW (after backing out of the hole). Alternate M functions may be
specified by setting parameters 74 (for CCW) and 84 (for CW). See G10 for examples.
The tap will continue to cut a short distance beyond the programmed Z height as the spindle comes to a stop before
reversing. When tapping blind holes, be sure to specify a Z height slightly above the bottom of the hole to prevent
the tool from reaching bottom before the spindle stops. The exact distance you must allow will depend on your
machine and the diameter and pitch of the tapping tool.
Note: If rigid tapping is enabled, a Q may be used to set the thread lead or pitch. However, because Q is not modal
in the case of Rigid Tapping, you must specify Q on every line at which Rigid Tapping is to occur.
• WARNING: Do not press FEED HOLD or CYCLE CANCEL while the tap is in the hole.
Example:
M3 S500 F27.78 ;start spindle CW, set up for 18 pitch tap
G84 X1 Y1 R.1 Z-.5 ;tap a 0.5 deep hole at X1 Y1
Y1.5 ;... and another one at X1 Y1.5
…
; Using Tool 15 Rigid Tap 6-32
G84 X0.337 Y0.925 Q0.03125 Z-0.35 R0.1 ;tap first hole
G84 X3.312 Y0.925 Q0.03125 Z-0.35 R0.1 ;tap second hole, must use Q
…
; Using Tool 22 Rigid Tap 4-40
G84 X1.862 Y1.627 Q0.025 Z-0.19 R0.1 ;tap first hole
G84 X2.862 Y1.627 Q0.025 Z-0.19 R0.1 ;tap second hole, must use Q
G84 X4.262 Y1.627 Q0.025 Z-0.19 R0.1 ;tap third hole, must use Q

G85 – Boring
G85 is similar to G81, except that the tool is retracted with a feedrate move instead of a rapid move. G85 may be
used for tapping with reversing tap heads such as the Tapmatic NCR series.
Example 1:
G85 X1 Y1 R.1 Z-.5 ;bore a 0.5" hole at X1 Y1
Example 2:
M3 S500 F27.78 ;start spindle CW, set for 18 pitch tap
M109/1/2 ;disable feedrate and spindle overrides
G85 X1 Y1 R.1 Z-.4 ;tap hole at X1 Y1 to a depth of 0.4"
M108/1/2 ;enable feedrate and spindle overrides

G89 - Boring cycle with dwell
G89 is similar to G85, except that it includes an optional dwell at the bottom of the hole before retracting the tool.
Example:
G89 X1 Y1 R.1 Z-.5 P.1 ;bore 0.5" hole at X1 Y1, dwell .1 seconds
G90 & G91 - Absolute/Incremental Positioning Mode

G90 selects absolute positioning, and G91 selects incremental positioning. In absolute positioning, all coordinates
are relative to the origin (0,0,0,0). In incremental positioning, all coordinates are distances relative to the last point.
G90 Absolute positioning

G91 Incremental coordinates
Example:
G90 X2 Y3 ;moves the X and Y axes from the current position to
;X2, Y3.
G91 X1 Y0 ;moves the X axis 1 inch referenced from the last X
;position, the Y axis does not move.
G92 - Set Absolute Position

G92 sets the current absolute position to the coordinates specified. If you are using multiple work coordinate
systems, positioning in all coordinate systems will be changed by the same amount (-4 in X, -3 in Y, +2 in Z, and -4
in W in the example below).
Example:
G0 X5 Y3 Z-2 W5 ;Moves to the specified location
G92 X1 Y0 Z0 W1 ;Sets the current position to the absolute
;position specified.

G98 - Initial Point Return
G98 sets the +Z return level to point I as pictured in Figure 1 in the Canned Cycle Section.
(G98 is the default setting)
G99 - R Point Return

G99 sets the +Z return level to point R as pictured in Figure 1 in the Canned Cycle Section.
G117, G118, G119 - Rotation of Pre-set Arc Planes

G117, G118 and G119 have the same functionality as G17, G18 and G19, respectively, except that they include 2
optional parameters P and Q to specify the arc plane rotation away from the pre-set arc plane: P specifies the arc
plane angle of rotation (in degrees) around the first axis and Q specifies the arc plane angle of rotation around the
second axis.
For the G117 plane, the "first axis" is X and the "second axis" is Y.
For the G118 plane, the "first axis" is Z and the "second axis" is X.
For the G119 plane, the "first axis" is Y and the "second axis" is Z. If P and/or Q is not specified, the angles are
assumed to be 0 degrees. If both P and Q parameters are 0, then the plane is assumed to be an orthogonal (pre-set)
arc plane. The center of the arc can be specified by the user in a 3D form both in G17-G19 and in G117-G119 (all
I, J, K values are allowed at the same time with G2 and G3). Any arc center component outside the circular plane
is ignored.
Example:
G00 X0 Y0 Z1 ;rapid move
G03 G18 X1 Y0 Z0 K-1 F20 ;arc mill
G00 X0 Y0 Z1.1 ;retract move
G01 Z1 ;move to start of contour
G03 G118 P1.000000 X0.9998 Y0.0175 Z0 K-1 ;arc mill rotated about Z
NOTE: G117-G119 will not be permitted while cutter compensation is turned on. Also, scaling is not allowed
while G117-G119 is specified and G117-G119 is not allowed while scaling is active.

Chapter 13
CNC Program Codes: M functions
M functions are used to perform specialized actions in CNC programs. Most of the M-series Control M functions
have default actions, but can be customized with the use of macro files.
Macro M functions
Most M-Series CNC M functions from 0 through 90 can be fully customized. Exceptions are M2, M6, and M25
that can be customized, but will always move the 3rd (Z) axis to the home position before executing the macro M
function commands. No M functions above 90 may be customized with macros. The default action listed will be
performed unless that M function has been customized.
To create a macro for an M function, a file must be created in the C:\CNC10 directory. The file's name must be
CNC10.Mxx where xx is the M function number used to call the macro. M functions 0-9 must use single digits in
the filename (e.g. Use M3, not M03). The contents of the file may be any valid M and G codes.
Each time the M function is encountered in a program, the macro file will be processed line by line.
* NOTE: Nesting of macro M functions is allowed. Recursive calls are not: if a macro M function calls itself, the
default action of the function will be executed.
Example: Turn on spindle with variable frequency drive and wait for "at speed" response.
Create file C:\CNC10\CNC10.M3 with contents as follows:
M94/1 ; request spindle start

M101/5 ; wait for up to speed signal
M2, M6, and M25 always move the Z-axis to the home position before any other motion. All other M functions
are performed after the motion of the current line is complete.
The M and G codes in a macro M function are not usually displayed on the screen as they are executed, and are all
treated as one operation in block mode. If you wish to see or step through macro M functions (e.g. for testing
purposes), set parameter #10 as follows:
0 Don't display or step through macro M functions

1 Display macro M functions, but don't step through them
2 Display and step through macro M functions
* NOTE: You cannot use block mode to step through a macro M function called using the G81 transformation (see
Chapter 12); the action timer will expire before you can press CYCLE START.
• NOTE: Only one M function per line is permitted.
M00 - Stop For Operator

Motion stops, and the operator is prompted to press the CYCLE START button to continue.
Default action:
M100/75

M01 - Optional Stop for Operator
M1 is an optional pause, whose action can be selected by the operator.
When optional stops are turned on, M1 will pause the currently running job until CYCLE START is pressed.
However, if optional stops are turned off, M1 will not pause the program.
*NOTE: If you plan to override the default action of M1 with a macro file, you may want to include a call to M1
within the macro file so that the default actions of M1 will still be effective in the overridden M1. Otherwise, if a
call to M1 is not included within the macro file, the new overridden M1 will cause optional stops to be ineffective.
M02 - Restart Program

M2 moves the Z-axis to the home position, performs any movement requested, and restarts the program from the
first line. The operator is prompted to press the CYCLE START button to continue.
M03 - Spindle On Clockwise

M3 requests the PLC to start the spindle in the clockwise direction.
Default action:
M95/2
M94/1
M04 - Spindle On Counterclockwise

M4 requests the PLC to start the spindle in the counterclockwise direction.
Default action:
M95/1
M94/2
M05 - Spindle Stop

M5 requests the PLC to stop the spindle.
Default action:
M95/1/2
M06 - Tool Change

M6 moves the Z-axis to the home position and stops the spindle and coolant. If an automatic tool changer is
installed, it then commands the tool changer to switch to the requested tool. Otherwise, it prompts the operator to
insert the tool and then press the CYCLE START button on the Operator Panel.
Default action (no tool changer):

M25 ; always does M25 first
M95/1/2/3/5 ; turn off spindle & coolant
M100/75 ; wait for CYCLE START button
Default action (tool changer installed):

M25 ; always does M25 first
M95/1/2/3/5 ; turn off spindle & coolant
M95/16 ; turn off tool changer strobe
M107 ; send tool number to tool changer
M94/16 ; turn on tool changer strobe
M101/32 ; wait for acknowledge from changer
M95/16 ; turn off tool changer strobe
M100/32 ; wait for acknowledge from changer
Manual tool changes are selected by setting Parameter 6 to 0 in the Machine Parameters table. The automatic tool
changer is selected by setting Parameter 6 to 1 (see Chapter 14).
The PLC program must be involved in commanding an automatic tool changer and its associated strobe, BCD and
Acknowledge lines. See Chapter 5 of the service manual for details of how such a PLC program could be
constructed.
M07 - Mist Coolant On

M7 causes the PLC to start the mist coolant system.
Default action:
M95/3
M94/5
M08 - Flood Coolant On

M8 causes the PLC to start the flood coolant system.
Default action:
M95/5
M94/3
M09 - Coolant Off

M9 causes the PLC to stop the coolant system.
Default action:
M95/3/5
M10 - Clamp On
M10 causes the PLC to activate the clamp.
Default action:
M94/4
Note: adding 256 to parameter 178 can switch M10 and M11.
M11 - Clamp Off

M11 causes the PLC to release the clamp.
Default action:
M95/4
M25 - Move To Z Home

M25 moves the Z-axis to the home position at the Z-axis maximum rate. The Z home position defaults to zero in
machine coordinates, but may be changed by changing the Z coordinate of the first Reference Point (on the Work
Coordinate System Configuration screen).
Default action:
G0 <Z home >

M26 - Set Axis Home
M26 sets the machine home position for the specified axis to the current position (after the line's movement). If no
axis is specified, M26 sets the Z-axis home position.
Example:
M91/X ; home X axis to minus home switch
M26/X ; set machine home for X-axis there
M92/Z ; home Z-axis to plus home switch
M26 ; set machine home for Z-axis there
M30 - Custom M Code

Intercon posts an M30 at the end of every G code program. By default M30 performs no operation. If you wish to
perform certain operations at the end of every program, this M code can be customized to meet you needs. For
more information on customizing M codes see the beginning of this chapter.
M39 - Air Drill

M39 is a default air drill activation sequence with a timeout. The sequence of operations is as follows:
M94/15 ; activate M function request 15

M103/2 ; start 2 second timer
M100/15 ; wait for input 15 to open
M95/15 ; deactivate M function request 15
M104 ; cancel timer
* NOTE: This program will be canceled by timer expiration if input 15 does not open within 2 seconds after M
function request 15 is activated. The PLC program must be involved in taking away the drill output when the CNC
program stops:
Example:
; PLC program
CNC_program_running is INP65 ;program running indicator
M15 is INP47 ;M function 15 indicator
drill_out is OUT5 ;air drill output relay
drill_out = M15 & CNC_program running ;Drill On if M94/15 and the
;CNC program is running. Drill
;Off if M95/15 or the CNC
;program is terminated.
M91 - Move to Minus Home

M91 moves to the minus home switch of the axis specified at the slow jog rate for that axis. After the minus home
switch is tripped, the axis reverses until the home switch clears, and stops when it detects the index pulse.
Example:
M91/X ; moves the X-axis to the minus home switch.
G92 X-10 ; sets X minus home switch at -10

M92 - Move to Plus Home
M92 moves to the plus home switch of the axis specified at the slow jog rate for that axis. After the plus home
switch is tripped, the axis reverses until the home switch clears, and stops when it detects the index pulse.
Example:
M92/X ; moves the X-axis to the plus home switch.
G92 X+10 ; Sets X plus home switch at +10
M93 - Release Motor Power

M93 releases the motor power for the axis specified. If no axis is specified, then all axes are released.
Example:
M93/X ; releases the X axis.
M93 ; releases the motors on all axes.
* NOTE: Any axis freed within a CNC program should not be used in that program afterwards. Incorrect
positioning may result.
M94/M95 - Output On/Off

There are sixteen user definable M function requests. M94 and M95 are used to request those inputs to turn on or
off respectively. M function requests 1-16 are mapped to the PLC as inputs 33 - 48, as shown in the following
table:
On Off PLC On Off PLC

Input Input
M94/1 M95/1 33 M94/9 M95/9 41
M94/2 M95/2 34 M94/10 M95/10 42
M94/3 M95/3 35 M94/11 M95/11 43
M94/4 M95/4 36 M94/12 M95/12 44
M94/5 M95/5 37 M94/13 M95/13 45
M94/6 M95/6 38 M94/14 M95/14 46
M94/7 M95/7 39 M94/15 M95/15 47
M94/8 M95/8 40 M94/16 M95/16 48
M Function request to PLC Input map
To use M94 and M95 to control a function external to the servo control, such as an indexer, the input request must
be mapped to one of the PLC outputs in the PLC program. See M94/M95 function usage in the PLC section of the
service manual.
Example:
M94/5/6 ; turns on input requests 5 and 6.
* NOTE: Requests 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are by default used to control the spindle CW, spindle CCW, flood coolant,
clamp, and mist coolant.
* NOTE: The request number doesn’t need to be (and generally is not) the same as the M function number or the
PLC output number. For example, M3 turns on output request #1 (PLC Input #33), which may activate PLC output
#14.

M98 - Call Subprogram (Optional)
M98 calls a user-specified subprogram. A subprogram is a separate program that can be used to perform a certain
operation (e.g. a drilling pattern, contour, etc.) many times throughout a main program.
Calling methods:
M98 Pxxxx Lrrrr
Or
M98 "program.cnc" Lrrrr
Where xxxx is the subprogram number (in file Oxxxx.CNC, 9100-9999 allowed, leading 0's required in filename),
rrrr is the repeat value, and "program.cnc" is the name of the subprogram file.
Subprograms are written just like normal programs, with one exception: an M99 should be at the end of the
subprogram. M99 transfers control back to the calling program.
Subprograms can call other subprograms (up to 20 nested levels of calling may be used), Macro M-functions, and
Macros. Macro M-functions and Macros can similarly call subprograms.
Subprograms 9100-9999 can also be embedded into a main program, using O9xxx to designate the beginning of the
subprogram and M99 to end it. CNC10 will read the subprogram and generate a file O9xxx.cnc. CNC10 will not
execute the subprogram until it encounters M98 P9xxx.
NOTE: An embedded subprogram definition must be placed before any calls to the subprogram.
Suppose that a drilling pattern of 4 holes is needed in 3 different locations:
This subprogram would handle the drilling and incremental moves between the holes:
O9101 ;Program O9101.cnc

G91 F10 ;Incremental positioning
G81 X0 Y0 R -.4 Z-.6 ;Drill lower left hole
Y1.5 R -.4 Z-.6 ;Drill upper left hole
X1 R -.4 Z-.6 ;Drill upper right hole
Y-1.5 R-.4 Z-.6 ;Drill lower right hole
G80 ;Cancel canned cycles
M99 ;End of subprogram

The main program would call this subprogram three times:
:Main program
G90 G0 X2 Y5 Z0.5 ;Move to first hole pattern
M98 P9101 L1 ;Call subprogram O9101.cnc
G90 G0 X4Y1 Z0.5 ;Move to second hole pattern
M98 P9101 L1 ;Call subprogram
G90 G0 X6 Y5 Z0.5 ;Move to third hole pattern
M98 P9101 L1 ;Call subprogram
:End program
Another example is "looping" or consecutively repeating a section of code. Here, the subprogram will be part of the
main program.
:Main program
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0.1
G1 Z0 F30
O9100 ;Beginning of subprogram
G91 G1 Z-0.1 F5
G90 X2 F30
Y2
X0 Y0
M99 ;End of subprogram 9100
M98 P9100 L3 ;Repeat O9100 3 times
M25 G49 ;End main program
M99 - Return From Macro or Subprogram

M99 designates the end of a subprogram or macro and transfers control back to the calling program when executed.
M99 may be specified on a line with other G codes. M99 will be the last action executed on a line. If M99 is not
specified in a subprogram file, M99 is assumed at the end of the file:
Example:
G1 X3 M99 ;Move to X3 then return to calling program.
If M99 is encountered in the main job file, it will be interpreted as the end of the job. If M99 is encountered in an
M function macro file, it will be interpreted as the end of any enclosing subprogram or macro, or as the end of the
job.

M100 - Wait For Input to Open
M100 waits for the specified input to open.
Example:
M94/7 ; turns on input request 7.
M100/1 ; waits for acknowledgment on input 1.
M101 - Wait For Input to Close

M101 waits for the specified input to close.
Example:
M95/7 ; turns off input request 7.
M101/1 ; waits for acknowledge on input 1.
M102 - Restart Program

M102 performs any movement requested, and restarts the program from the first line. The Z-axis is NOT moved to
the home position, and the operator is NOT prompted to press the CYCLE START button to continue.
M103 - Programmed Action Timer

M103 starts a timer for the operations in a program. If M104 (stop timer) is not executed before the specified time
expires, the program will be canceled and the message "Programmed action timer expired" will be displayed. This
function detects the failure of a device connected to the PLC and prevents further programmed action. M103 and
M104 must be used for air drill cycles.
Example: Activate a device and wait for a response. If there is no response within 4.5 seconds, cancel the
program.
M94/12 ; turn on input request 12

M103/4.5 ; start 4.5 second timer
M100/4 ; wait for input 4 to open
M104 ; input 4 opened, cancel timer
* NOTE: The PLC program must detect the cancellation of the program and deactivate all programmed machine
functions.
Example:
; PLC program
CNC_program_running is INP65 ;program running indicator
M12 is INP44 ;M function 12 indicator
relay_out is OUT5 ;relay On/Off
relay_out = M12 & CNC_program_running ;Relay On if M94/12 and the
;CNC program is active. Relay
;Off if M95/12 or the CNC
;program is terminated.
M104 - Cancel Programmed Action Timer

M104 stops the timer started by the last M103 executed.

M105 - Move Minus to Switch
M105 moves the requested axis in the minus direction at the current feedrate until the specified switch opens.
Example:
M105/X P5 F30 ; move the X axis in minus direction at 30"/min
; until switch #5 opens
G92 X10 ; Sets X position to 10
M106 - Move Plus to Switch

M106 moves the requested axis in the plus direction at the current feedrate until the specified switch opens.
Example:
M106/X P3 F30 ; move the X-axis in the plus direction at 30"/min, until switch #3 open
G92 X10 ; Sets X position to 10
M107 - Output BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) Tool Number

M107 sends the current tool number to the automatic tool changer, via the PLC. The number is sent as BCD.
M107 does not set the tool changer strobe or look for an acknowledgement from the changer (see M6).
Example:
M107 ; send request for tool to change
M94/16 ; turn on tool changer strobe
M101/5 ; wait for acknowledge on input 5
M95/16 ; turn off strobe
M100/5 ; wait for acknowledge to be removed
M108 - Enable Override Controls

M108 re-enables the feedrate override and/or spindle speed override controls if they were disabled with M109. A
parameter of “1” indicates the feedrate override; “2” indicates the spindle speed override.
Example:
M109/1/2 ; disables feedrate and spindle speed overrides
M108/1 ; re-enables feedrate override
M108/2 ; re-enables spindle speed override
M109 - Disable Override Controls

M109 disables the feedrate override and/or spindle speed override controls. It may be used before tapping with
G85 to assure that the machine runs at the programmed feedrate and spindle speed. It is not necessary to specify
M109 with G74 or G84; those cycles automatically disable and re-enable the override controls. M109 cannot be
used in MDI mode.
Example:
M3 S500 ; start spindle in clockwise direction, at 500 rpm
F27.78 ; set feedrate for 18 pitch tap
M109/1/2 ; disable feedrate and spindle speed overrides
G85 X0 Y0 R.1 Z-.5 ; tap a hole
M108/1/2 ; re-enable overrides

M115/M116/M125/M126 – Protected Move Probing Functions
The protected move probing functions provide the capability to program customized probing routines.
The structure for these commands is:
Mnnn /Axis pos Pp Ff L1
Where:
nnn is either 115, 116, 125, or 126.
Axis is a valid axis label, i.e., X, Y, Z, etc.
pos is an optional position
p is a PLC bit number, which can be negative.
f is a feedrate (in units per minute.)
L1 is an option for the M115/M116 commands that prevents an error if the probe does not detect
a surface
For M115 and M116 functions, the indicated axis will move to pos (if specified) until the corresponding PLC bit p
state is 1, unless p is negative, in which case movement is until the PLC bit state is 0. A “p value” of 1 to 80 (or -1
to -80) specifies PLC bits INP1-INP80, 81 to 160 (or -80 to -160) specifies PLC bits OUT1-OUT80, and 161 to 240
(or -161 to -240) specifies PLC bits MEM1-MEM80. Warnings are generated in the CNC10 message window for
"Missing P value" and "Invalid P value."
If “pos” is not specified, M115 will move the axis in the negative direction, and M116 will move the axis in the
positive direction. Note if “pos” is specified, then if does not matter whether M115 or M116 is used.
If “pos” is not specified, the movement is bound by the settings in the software travel limits. In the absence of
software travel limits, movement is bound by the maximum probing distance (Machine Parameter 16). In cases
where “pos” is specified, it is still bound by the software travel limits.
If the bounded position is reached before the awaited PLC bit state is found, a "Probe unable to detect surface"
error will be generated unless the L1 option is specified.
For M125 and M126 protected move functions, the behavior is identical to that of the M115 and M116 commands,
except in regards to the PLC bit state. M125 and M126 will generate an "Unexpected probe contact" error message
if the specified PLC bit state is triggered, again stopping any running job.
In summary, the M115 and M116 commands are to be used when one expects contact to be made, and M125 and
M126 commands are to be used when one does not expect any contact to be made.
Example:
Finding the center of a vertical slot. In this example, it is assumed that there is a probe connected to INP15 and
that the probe tip is positioned somewhere in the slot, such that movement along the X-axis will cause a probe
trigger.
G20 ; Set mode to English

M115/X P-15 F20 ; Move X minus at 20 ipm until probe trip
M116/X P15 F5 ; Move X plus at 5 ipm until probe clears
#100 = #5041 ; Record the point in user variable #100
M116/X P-15 F20 ; Move X plus at 20 ipm until probe trip
M115/X P15 F5 ; Move X minus at 5 ipm until probe clears
X[[#100+#5041]/2] ; Move X to center of slot

M120 - Open data file (overwrite existing file)
This M function will open the requested data file for writing. If no drive or directory is specified with the file
name, then the file will be opened in the same directory as the CNC program. If the file cannot be successfully
opened, then an error will be returned, ultimately terminating the job. If a data file is already open when M120 is
called, that file will first be closed, then the new file opened.
Example:
M120 "probetst.dat" ; Opens probetst.dat file to write data too
M121 - Open data file (append to existing file)

This M function will open the requested file for writing at the end of the file. If no drive or directory is specified
with the file name, then the file will be opened in the same directory as the CNC program. If the file does not
already exist, it will be created. This is not an error. If the file cannot be successfully opened, then an error will be
returned, ultimately terminating the job. If a data file is already open when M121 is called, that file will first be
closed, then the new file opened.
Example:
M121 "c:\probetst.dat" ; Opens probetst.dat file to add data to it
M122 - Record position(s) and optional comment in data file

This M function will write the current expected position value to the data file, in the usual format (i.e. axis label
before number, 4 decimal places in inch mode, 3 decimal places in millimeter mode. Any comment that appeared
on the line with M122 will be outputted after the position(s). With no axis arguments, M122 will write the
positions of all installed axes. With axis arguments, it will write the positions only of the requested axes. Positions
will be written in local (not machine) coordinates, in native machine units. If no data file has been opened with
M120 or M121 before M122 is called, then M122 will return an error and terminate the job. The parameter L1 may
be used to suppress the new line character normally outputted after the last position.
Examples (M function and sample output):

M122 -> X1.2345 Y-3.2109 Z-0.5678
M122 /Z ; at 10 ipm -> Z-.4321 ; at 10 ipm
M122 /X/Y -> X-1.0000 Y0.8732
M122 /X L1 -> X-1.5000
M122 /X -> X-1.5000 X-2.0000
M123 - Record value and/or comment in data file

This M function will write the specified parameter value (if any) to the data file, followed by any comment that
appeared on the line with M123. If a P value is specified, M123 will record the numeric value (4 decimal places in
inches, 3 in millimeters). If neither a P value nor a comment was specified, M123 does nothing. This is not an
error. If no data file has been opened with M120 or M121 before M123 is called, then M123 will return an error
and terminate the job. The parameter L1 may be used to suppress the new line character normally outputted after
the last value. The R and Q parameters can be used to specify the field width and precision, respectively.
Examples (M function and sample output):

M123 P1.2345 ->1.2345
M123 P#A ; first macro argument ->1.2345 first macro argument
M123 ; Probing X+ to surface ->Probing X+ to surface
M123 -><nothing>
M123 ; -><nothing>
M123 ;; my comment ->; my comment
M123 Q0 P1.23 ->1
M123 Q1 P1.23 ->1.2
M123 R7 Q2 L1 P1.234
M123 R7 Q2 P98.765 ->1.23 98.77
Chapter 14
Configuration
(F3 from Setup)
General
The first four options, F1 through F4, will display a set of parameters. Each option is explained in detail below. The
ESC key will return you to the previous screen (Setup).
The F5 - Test key should only be used by qualified Centroid technicians to perform automated system tests.
The configuration option provides you with a means for modifying the machine and controller configuration. The
majority of information in this section should not be changed without contacting your dealer. Some of the data, if
corrupt or incorrect, could cause personal injury or machine damage.
Password
When you press F3 - Config from the Setup Screen, you may be prompted to enter a password. This level of security
is necessary so that users do not accidentally change vital parameters. The original default password is distributed in
the documentation provided to the owner of the machine when the control is installed. This password is changeable
via Parameter 42.
If you know the password, type it and press ENTER. If the password you enter is incorrect, a message will appear
telling you the password was incorrect and the password prompt will reappear. Pressing ESC will remove the prompt.
If you don't know the password, simply press ENTER. You will be given access to the configuration options so that
you can view the information. However, you will not be able to change any of the data.

Control Configuration
Pressing F1 - Contrl from the configuration screen will display the Control Configuration screen. The Control
Configuration screen provides you with a method of changing controller dependent data. Each of the fields is
discussed in detail below.
If you wish to change a field, use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired field. Type the new
value and press ENTER, or press the SPACE bar to toggle. When you are done editing, press F10 – Save to save any
changes you have made. If you wish to discard your changes and restore the previous values, press ESC.
DRO Display Units

This field controls the units of measure that the DRO displays. The two options are 'Millimeters' and 'Inches.' When
this field is highlighted by the cursor, "Press SPACE to change" appears at the bottom of the screen. This message is
explaining that pressing the SPACE bar will toggle the value of this field between the two options.
The DRO display units do not have to be the same as the machine units of measure (explained below). This field is
provided for users of the G20 & G21 codes so that they may view the tool position in terms of job units (see Chapter
12).
Machine Units of Measure

This field controls which units of measure the machine uses for each job. The two options are 'Millimeters' and
'Inches'. Press the SPACE bar to toggle the field between the two options.
This field determines the default interpretation of job dimensions and feedrates. If 'Inches' is selected, all feedrates and
dimensions will be interpreted as inches as well as any unit dependent parameters.
* NOTE: This field should rarely, if ever, be changed. If you wish to run a job in units other than the default machine
units, use the G20 & G21 codes.

Maximum Spindle Speed (High Range)
This field sets the high range maximum spindle speed for those machines that have a variable frequency spindle drive
controller (VFD). All spindle speeds entered in a CNC program are sent to the PLC as percentages of this maximum
value.
If your machine is equipped with a dual range drive and VFD, the controller will not exceed the spindle speed set by
this field while in high gear. See the Machine Parameters section below for information on setting the gear ratios for
medium and low gear ranges. If your machine has a VFD but is not equipped with a dual range drive, this field
determines the maximum spindle speed.
Minimum Spindle Speed (High Range)

This parameter is used to adjust the minimum spindle speed for the high range. This parameter allows the operator to
set the minimum value for spindle speed to a value other than 0. All changes in spindle speed are made in relationship
to this value, with this parameter as the minimum value. The values stored can range from 0 to 500000.0 RPM.
Machine Home At Powerup

This field controls how the machine will home at powerup. Set Machine Home at Powerup to Home Switch if you
have limit/home switches or safe hard stops for all axes, and wish to use the switches or stops for homing. Set
Machine Home at Powerup to Ref Mark – HS if you have fixed reference marks for any axis. In Ref Mark homing,
axes that contain a zero (0) for the plus or minus home switch in the Machine Configuration designate that axis to have
a Ref Mark home, while non-zero values specify Limit Switch homing. Set Machine Home at Powerup to Jog if you
need to manually move or jog the machine to its home position. See Chapter 1 for more information about machine
home.
PLC Type
This field tells the controller which PLC type is installed. The possible values are 'Absent,' 'Lite,' 'Normal,' and 'Dual.'
The value should not be changed unless a different PLC type is installed. Use the SPACE key to select among the
four options.
The standard PLC types installed are dependent on your M-series number and the options that may have been
purchased. Check the information sheet on page ix for which type of PLC is installed on your machine, or check with
your dealer for more information.
Console Type
Set for type of console installed. "T-" for lathe, "M-" for mill. Current console type is “Uniconsole-2”.
Jog Panel Required

This field tells the controller whether a Jog Panel must be installed in order to run jobs. Also if set to “Yes” the control
requires you to press cycle start twice to start a program but if it’s set to “No” programs will start with one press of
cycle start.
Screen Blank Delay

This field determines the delay used for the screen blank function. Entering a value will specify the number of minutes
of idle time until the screen will go blank. The blanking function only works if no jobs are running. For example, a
value of 5 would blank the screen in 5 minutes if no actions were taken. When the screen is blank, pressing any key
will restore the screen.
A value of zero will disable the blank function. However, if the display is kept on for long periods of time without the
blank function enabled, the image of a screen may become 'burned' into the monitor. That is, you will be able to see
this image of the screen on the monitor whether the monitor is on, off, or in some other screen.

Remote Drive & Directory
This field sets up the remapped default drive and directory for the F3 - Remote key in the Load Job screen. This
allows you to conveniently load files from an attached computer via LAN network (via RJ-45 Ethernet connection).
The Control will usually remap the attached computer's C: hard drive as drive E:, depending on the way it was set up.
User Specified Paths

Operators can now specify paths for INTERCON files, posted INTERCON files, Digitize files and CAD files. These
paths are specified in pathm.ini. This file is automatically generated by CNC10 if it does not exist. The default
pathm.ini file is:
INTERCON_PATH=c:\intercon\
ICN_POST_PATH=c:\cnc10\ncfiles\
DIGITIZE_PATH=c:\cnc10\ncfiles\
CAD_PATH=c:\cnc10\ncfiles\
Path tag Purpose of path

INTERCON_PATH Main directory containing *.icn files
ICN_POST_PATH Directory INTERCON places *.cnc files created when posting *.icn files.
DIGITIZE_PATH Directory digitize files are saved to. Directory used by F4 key in Load Job menu when
parameter 4 is set to 2.
CAD_PATH Default directory used by the Import DXF file menu in Intercon.
This directory is also used to store CAD files generated with the DIG->CAD option in the
Utility menu.
Machine Configuration
Pressing F2 - Machine from the configuration screen will display the machine configuration screen. The machine
configuration screen provides you with a method of changing machine dependent data.
If you wish to change the Jog or Motor parameters, press F1 - Jog or F2 - Motor to select the Jog or Motor screens.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and select the desired field. Type the new value and press ENTER or press the
SPACE bar to toggle. When you are done editing, press F10 - Save to save any changes you have made. If you wish
to discard your changes and restore the previous values, press ESC. Pressing ESC again will return you to the
previous screen (Configuration).

F1 - Jog Parameters (Values should be recorded on the Control Parameters
page at beginning of manual.)
This screen contains jog and feedrate information. See the figure below.
A description of each of these parameters is listed below.

* NOTE: Some of these values are set automatically by the Autotune option (See PID Configuration below).
Slow Jog: Determines the speed of motion on an axis when slow jog is selected and a jog button is pressed. The slow
jog rate cannot be set to a value greater than the maximum rate.
Fast Jog: Determines the speed of motion on an axis when fast jog is selected and a jog button is pressed. The fast jog
rate cannot be set to a value greater than the maximum rate.
Max Rate: Determines the maximum feedrate of each individual axis. The feedrate on each axis can never exceed
Max Rate, even if the feedrate override knob on the front panel is turned up above 100%. (See also the Machine
Parameters section for the "Multi-Axis Max Feedrate" parameter that limits the feedrate along move vectors, not just
each individual axis.)
* NOTE: The maximum rate may be set to a smaller value if you wish to run your machine at a slower rate.
Deadstart: Determines the speed an axis will decelerate to before stopping or reversing direction. A low setting will
cause a large slowdown before a reverse in direction, causing your machine to be more accurate. A high setting will
cause less slowdown before reversals, but this may cause your machine to "bang" which may cause a decrease in
accuracy. This parameter should not be changed.
Delta Vmax: The maximum instantaneous velocity change that will be commanded on a vector transition. This
parameter should not be changed.
Travel (-): The maximum distance the axis can travel in the minus direction from the home position. Set this
parameter to create a software limit that stops the axis before the fixture or tool collides with the limit switches or hard
stops.
Travel (+): The maximum distance the axis can travel in the plus direction from the home position. This parameter is
especially useful when using a part or fixture larger than the table. Set this parameter to create a software limit that
stops the axis before the fixture or part collides with the machine or the limit switch/hard stop.
F2 - Motor Parameters (Values should be recorded on the Control
Parameters page at beginning of manual.)
This screen contains information about the motors, ballscrews, and switches installed on your machine. See the figure
below.
A description of each of these parameters is listed below.
* WARNING: The Motor Parameters should not be changed without contacting your dealer. Corrupt or incorrect
values could cause damage to the machine, personal injury, or both.
Special function indicators: These appear, if present, between the axis number and the label. ‘s’ – indicates the axis is
the spindle, ‘p$’ – axis is paired with axis ‘$’, ‘h$’ – axis is a handwheel paired with axis ‘$’, ‘*’ – pairing conflict.
See Machine Parameters for more information on setting up special functions.
Label: The letter you want to use to identify the axis. The first three axes should normally be X, Y, and Z. If a fourth
axis is installed, it is usually named W or B. If you change a label, for example from X to A, the controller will then
accept G-codes for axis A instead of X.
If fewer than four axes are present, the unused entries should be labeled N. If an axis is manually operated (it has an
encoder but no motor), it should be labeled M.
For a manual Z-axis, the 3rd axis label should be set to @ symbol. This setting allows for two axes posting in Intercon.
* WARNING: Intercon does NOT post two axis programs if the 3rd axis is labeled M.
* NOTE: Tool length compensation (G43-G44) and canned drilling cycles (G73-G89) always affect the third axis,
regardless of its axis label. Tool diameter compensation (G41-G42) always affects the first and second axes,
regardless of their axis labels.
Motor revs/unit: The number of revolutions of the motor that results in one unit of measurement of movement. That is,
if the machine units of measurement are inches, then Motor revs/inch is the number of revolutions of the motor that
results in one inch of movement. Handwheel note: For handwheels, this number is the number of clicks per revolution
of the handwheel. If your handwheel has no detents (click positions) use “100”.
Encoder counts/rev: The counts per revolution of the encoders on your servomotors.

Lash compensation: The amount of backlash in the axis. This occurs when the table loses distance due to loose parts
during direction reversals. Consult your machine manual or M-Series Service Manual for instructions on measuring
backlash.
Limits: The PLC input numbers corresponding to any limit switches that you may have on your machine. Your
installer should provide this information. If no limit switch is installed, this field should be set to 0.
Homes: The PLC input numbers of any Home Switches you may have. These are similar to the limit switches. If
your machine does not have home switches, this field should be set to the Limit Switch value. If no home or limit
switch is installed, this field should be set to 0. You may then use hard stops as homing points if you choose.
* NOTE: The Home Switch should never be physically located beyond the Limit Switch.
Direction reversed: Used to match the +/- reference of your machine to the control electronics. Toggle this value if
you actually move in the X minus direction (reverse) when you jog X+.
Screw Compensation: This value indicates whether mapping ballscrew compensation is enabled. When enabled a
preset ballscrew map compensates for error along the entire ballscrew. For more information, contact your dealer. It
is recommended you enable ballscrew error compensation at all times.
F3 - Find Home
Press F3 to move an axis to its plus or minus home switch.
F4 - Set Home
Press F4 to set Machine Home for an axis at its current position. This is usually performed after Find Home. This
operation should not be used to set the part zero position. To set the part zero position, use the Part Setup screen.
F5 – Manual Ballscrew Compensation

This option lets you edit the ballscrew compensation tables.
* WARNING: The ballscrew compensation tables should not be changed without contacting your dealer. Corrupt or
incorrect values could adversely affect the accuracy of your machine. It could also cause unexplained positioning or
axes moves.

Machine Parameters
(F3 - Parms from Configuration)
Pressing F3 - Parms from the configuration screen will display the machine parameters screen. This screen
provides you with a method of changing various parameters that are used by the control.
If you wish to change a field, use the arrow keys to move the cursor and select the desired field. Type the
new value and press ENTER. When you are done editing the fields, press F10 – Save to save any changes
you have made. Press ESC to return to the previous screen (Setup). A short description of the parameter
will appear below the table. In the screen example above, parameter 6 determines whether an Auto Tool
Changer is installed.
F3 - Next Table will toggle the display parameters between parameters 0-99 and parameters 100-199.

Bit-mapped parameters
Certain control parameters are defined by bit-mapped values. In order to change these parameters you must
understand how bit mapping works. A bit-mapped parameter is stored as a number, representing a 16-bit
value in the control. If a certain bit needs to be turned on, that bit’s binary value must be added to the
parameter value, if the bit needs turned off, its binary value must be subtracted from the parameter value.
The values for each of the 16 bits’ can be seen in the table below.
Bit-Mapped Parameter Bit’s

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
To set bit-mapped parameters simply add together the bit values that you need to have enabled.
Examples:
Parameter Bit number and settings
value 15 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4
0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ON
11 = 8+2+1 X X X X X X X X X X X X ON X ON ON
24 = 16+8 X X X X X X X X X X X ON ON X X X
The following parameters are currently defined:
Parameter Definition Default setting

0 E-Stop PLC Bit 0
1 Y jog key orientation 0
2 G-Code Interpretation Control and Slaving Rotary axis feedrate 0
3 Modal Tool and Height Offset Control 0
4 Remote File Loading Flag 0
5 Suppress Machine Home Setup 0
6 Auto Tool Changer Installed 0
7 Display Colors 0
8 Available Coolant System(s) 2
9 Display Language 0
10 Macro M-Function Control 0
11 Touch Probe PLC Input 0
12 Touch Probe Tool Number 0
13 Probing Recovery Distance 0.05
14 Fast Probing Rate 10
15 Slow Probing Rate 1
16 Probing Search Distance 10
17 Tool Detector Reference Number 0
18 PLC Input Spindle Inhibitor 0

19 MPG modes 0
20 Ambient Temperature 72
21-24 Motor Heating Coefficients Refer to text
25-28 Motor Cooling Coefficients Refer to text
29 Warning Temperature 150
30 Limit Temperature 180
31 Spindle Speed Output Port 0
32 Spindle Serial Port Baud Rate 19,200
33 Spindle Motor Gear Ratio 1
34 Spindle Encoder Counts/Rev 8,000
35 Spindle Encoder Input 4
36 Rigid Tapping Enable/Disable 0
37 Spindle Deceleration Time 10
38 Multi-Axis Max Feedrate 0
39 Feedrate Override Knob Limit 120
40 Basic Jog Increment 0.0001”
41 Handwheel x100 Speed, User Jog Increment 0.25”
42 Password for Configuration Menus 0
43 Automatic tool measurement options 0
44 TT1 PLC input # 0
45 Z axis MPG enable PLC input 0
46 Z axis MPG handwheel Turns Ratio 0
47 Z axis MPG handwheel encoder counts 0
60 Digital Filter Size 1
61 High Power Stall Timeout 0.5
62 High Power Stall PID Limit 115
63 High Power Idle PID Multiplier 1.5
64 Fourth Axis Pairing 0
65-67 Spindle Gear Ratios 1
68 Minimum Rigid Tapping Spindle Speed 100
69 Duration For Minimum Spindle Speed 1.25
70 Offset Library Inc/Decrement Amount .001"/.02mm
71 Part Setup Detector Height 0
72 Data M-Function Options 0
73 Peck Drill Retract Amount 0.05
74 M-Function executed at bottom of tapping cycle 4
75 Axis Summing Display Control 0
76 Manual Input Unrestricted Distance 0
77 Manual Input Movement Tolerance 0
78 Spindle Speed Display and Operations 0
79 Auto Brake Mode PLC Bit for Uniconsole-2 70
80 Voltage Brake Applied Message Frequency 1
81 Air Drill M-Function (executed instead of Z movement in drilling) -1
82 Spindle Drift Adjustment 108
83 Deep Hole Clearance Amount 0.05
84 M-Function executed at return to initial point of tapping cycle 3
87-90 Autotune Accel Time and ka. 48
91-94 Axis Properties 0
95-98 Autotune Move Distance 2
99 Cutter Compensation Look-ahead 2
100 Intercon comment generation 0
101 Intercon clearance amount 0.1
102 Intercon spindle coolant delay 3.0
103 Intercon corner federate override 50.0
104 Intercon modal line parameters 0
105 Intercon modal arc parameters 0
106 Intercon modal drilling cycle parameters 0
115 Intercon Help 0
120 Probe stuck clearance amount 0.10”
121 Grid digitize prediction minimum Z pullback 0.002”
122 Grid digitizing deadband move distance 0.0002”
123 Radial digitizing clearance move 0
124-127 PLC inputs for jogging 0
128 Handwheel MPG mapping 0
129 Handwheel MPG display control 0
130 Z axis on/off selection 0
131 4th axis on/off selection 0
132 5th axis heating coefficient Refer to text
136 5th axis cooling coefficient Refer to text
140 Message log priority level 1
141 Maximum message log lines 1000
142 Message log trim amount 1000
143 DRO properties (load meters, 4/5 digits, DTG) 0
144 Comparison rounding 0
145 Advanced macro properties (fast branching) 0
146 Feed hold threshold for feed rate override 0
148 Fast Jog Before Home is Set 0
149 Spindle Speed/Surface Footage Threshold 0
150 Run-Time Graphics 0
152 5th axis Autotune accel time and Ka 48
156 5th axis Autotune move distance 2
160 Enhanced ATC 0
161 ATC Maximum Tool Bins 0
166 5th axis properties 0
170-179 XPLC parameters 0
180 File Transfer COM Port 0
181 File Transfer Baud Rate 19.2
182 File Transfer Data, Parity and Stop bit settings 801
183 File Transfer Flow Control Setting 0
184 File Transfer COM timeout 10
185 File Transfer Serial Port Option 0
188-199 Aux key functions 0

Parameter 0 – E-Stop PLC Bit
This parameter specifies the PLC bit to which the physical Emergency Stop switch is connected. It is mainly used for
ATC applications that use custom PLC messages. See table below for examples.
PLC Type ESTOP Input on PLC Parameter Value

RTK3 Input 11 11
PLCIO2 Input 11 11
DC3IO Input 11 11
Servo3IO Input 1 1
Parameter 1 – Y jog key orientation

This parameter is a 3-bit field where bit 0 is not used in the mill software. Bit 1 sets the direction of movement for the
Y+ and Y- jog keys and bit 2 will swap the X and Y jog keys. This should always be set to 0 except for very special
applications.
Bit Function Description Parameter Value

0 Not Used
1 Flip direction of Y jog keys? Yes=2, No=0
2 Exchange X axis and Y-axis jog keys? Yes=4, No=0
Parameter 2 - G-code Interpretation Control and Slaving Rotary axis

feedrate
This parameter is a 3-bit field that controls optional interpretation of several G-codes. The following table shows the
functions performed by the value entered in this parameter:

0 Arc centers I, J, K are absolute in G90 mode? Yes = 1
No = 0
1 Allow Z being specified alone to be sufficient to trigger execution of a Yes = 2
canned tapping or drilling cycle to be executed? No = 0
2 Interpret dwell times associated with G4, G74, G82, G84, and G89 as Yes = 4
milliseconds rather than seconds? No = 0
3 Slaving rotary axis feedrate to non-rotary axis feedrate Yes = 8
No = 0
4 Selects the center for scale, mirror and rotate. By default the center will Yes = 16
be 0,0,0. Add 16 to this parameter to make the center of scale, mirror and No = 0
rotate the current position.
Parameter 3 - Modal Tool and Height Offset Control

This parameter is a 2-bit field. Bit 1 controls whether or not the last tool and height offset activated during a job run
will remain active after the job is complete as well as controlling the Tool status display in the Status Window.
Bit Meaning Parameter Value

0 Tool and Height Offset numbers will be modal and remain active between jobs. Yes = 0
Tool Status display will remain active even when job is not running. No = 1
Tool Status display will show the current T and H number.
1 Reference tool position set to Z home Yes = 1 No =0

Parameter 4 - Remote File Loading Flag
This parameter controls the action of the Load Job menu when CNC job files are selected from drives letters higher
than C or the F3 – Remote option. These drives (i.e. drives D, E, F, etc.) are presumed to be network drives, Interlink
drives or extra hard drives.
Value Meaning
0 Job files are not copied or cached. They are run from whichever drives they reside on.
1 Job files are copied to the C drive (c:\cnc10\ncfiles) when they are loaded. The local copy is
used when the job runs.
2 Turn on file caching. Job files are temporarily cached on the C drive. The cached copy is used
while the job is running. The cached copy is deleted when the next job is loaded or when
Parameter 4 changes to a 0 or 1.
Digitize files are cached as the machine is digitizing. When digitizing is complete, the resulting
file is copied to the digitize directory specified in pathm.ini.
File caching is useful for machines with both a flash card and a hard drive. By caching job files from the hard drive on
the flash card, the hard drive is not used while the job is running. As a result, the life of the hard drive is extended and
the flash card does not fill up with job files.
Parameter 5 - Suppress Machine Home Setup

This parameter controls machine homing upon startup of the control. The following table details the functions
controlled by this parameter:

0 Suppress the requirement to set machine home before Yes = 1
running jobs? No = 0
1 Display router bit map at homing screen Yes = 2, No = 0
2 Disable stall detection when CNC10 first starts. Yes = 4, No = 0
Bit 0 suppresses the requirement to set machine home before running. If bit 0 of Parameter 5 is 0, machine home must
be set before jobs may be run. If bit 0 of Parameter 5 is 1, machine home is not requested or required, but Graphing
and running of jobs will not work until the Z-axis is homed.
NOTE: Parameter 5 Bit 0 is separate from the "Machine Home at Powerup" flag in the Control Configuration Screen.
Parameter 5 Bit 0 determines whether you must home the machine; the "Machine Home at Powerup" flag determines
how you will home the machine, if you must do so.
Parameter 6 - Automatic Tool Changer Installed

This parameter tells the control whether an automatic tool changer installed on your machine. This field affects the
action of M6 in your CNC programs. See M6 under M functions in Chapter 13. It also affects whether the ATC key is
present in the Tool Offset Setup and whether to save the last tool change number in the job files.
Value Meaning
0 Auto Tool Changer NOT Installed
1 Auto Tool Changer Installed
Parameter 7 - Display Colors

This parameter determines what combination of colors will be used for display. If you have a color display, set this
parameter to 0. If you have a monochrome display (especially a monochrome LCD panel) set this parameter to 1.

Parameter 8 - Available Coolant Systems
This parameter is used by Intercon to determine what coolant systems are available on the machine. It should be set as
follows:
Value Meaning
1 Mist Coolant (M7) only
2 Both coolant systems
3 Flood Coolant (M8) only
Parameter 9 - Display Language

This parameter determines what language will be used for menus, prompts and error messages.
Value Meaning
0 English
1 Spanish
2 French
3 Traditional Chinese
4 Simplified Chinese
Parameter 10 - Macro M function handling

This parameter is a 4-bit field that controls various aspects of M functions. The following table shows the functions
performed by the value entered in this parameter. The default value is 0.

0 Display M & G codes in M function macros? Yes = 1, No = 0
1 Step through M function macros in Block Mode? Yes = 2, No = 0
2 Brushless motor option: Decelerate smoothly to stop (pause) on M105 and Yes = 4, No = 0
M106? (Digitizing and Probing moves.) “Yes” means decelerate
smoothly. Choosing “yes” takes more time on each probing move and is
slightly less accurate. “No” means hard stop. “No” is faster and slightly
more accurate but can cause excessive vibration on brushless systems.
3 Move to Z home on M6? No = 8, Yes = 0
Parameter 11 – DP4 PLC Input Number and Contact State

This parameter is used for the PLC input number that is used by the DP4 Touch Probe. Allowable range is a single
value, +/- 1 through 240. A Positive number indicates Closed on contact and a negative number indicates Open on
contact. A list of default settings for different console types are listed below. Warning: Changing this parameter can
cause damage to your probe. You should contact your Dealer or Local Tech Rep before any modifications are made.
Console Type/Model Input Number PLC Type/Model Input Number

M39 15 DC3IO 14
M39s 14 RTK3 14
M400 15 Servo3IO 2
M400s 14 PLCIO2 15
M15-10 2 15/15 15
M400 ATC (RTK3) 14 RTK2 15
M400 ATC (PLCIO2) 15 Koyo ATC 1

Parameter 12 – Touch Probe Tool Number
This parameter is the tool number of the DP4 probe. Allowable range is 0 through 200. By default the value is 10. This
is used to look up the length offset and tip diameter of the probe in the Tool Offset Library.
Parameter 13 – Recovery Distance

This parameter is the distance, in inches, the probe moves off a surface after initial contact (only during probing
cycles), before returning to the surface to take a recorded reading. The default setting is 0.05.
Parameter 14 – Fast Probing Rate

The fast probing rate is used for positioning moves and initial surface detection, and is determined by the machines
response time and the permitted probe deflection. The default is 10 in/min. This is a very conservative feedrate, in
actual use 20 to 30 in/min is a good value and will not have any detrimental impact on accuracy in most cases.
Parameter 15 – Slow Probing Rate

The slow probing rate is used for the final measurement moves. The default setting is 1 in/min. The following are some
typical accuracy tolerances with the corresponding value set in parameter 15:
Probing Rate Accuracy

0.5 in/min 0.0001”
1 in/min 0.0002”
1.5 in/min 0.0005”
3.5 in/min 0.001”
18 in/min 0.005”
Parameter 16 – Maximum Probing Distance

This is the maximum distance that the Boss and Web probing cycles “search” for a surface in a given direction if no
travel limits have been entered. The default setting is 10 inches. A larger value should be entered for the boss and web
cycles if you are measuring very large features. These settings are conservative measurements and can be used initially
for startup purposes. However, they can be changed to accommodate your work.
Parameter 17 – Detector Location Return Point

A non-zero value specifies the number of the reference return point (entered into the WCS menu) directly above a
permanently mounted TT-1 tool detector. When the Auto function is called up in the tool offset library, the control will
position the table to the return point specified by this parameter, and touch the tool off the TT-1 Tool detector. In
controls with software version 7.07 or earlier, there are two separate return points available: enter 1 or 2. In controls
with software version 7.08 or later, there are four separate return points available: enter 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Entry Return Point

0 None
1 G28
2 G30
3 G30P1
4 G30P2
A zero indicates that the tool detector is no permanently mounted; automatic tool measurement will be performed
without X/Y axis movement.

Parameter 18 - PLC Input Inhibit Parameter
This parameter stores the input for the Spindle Inhibit feature. A positive value must be entered if a "normally closed"
probe is to be used with the control. A negative value must be entered if a "normally open" probe is to be used with
the control. The absolute value of Parameter 18 will directly reflect the PLC input the Spindle Inhibit is wired to.
When this parameter is set, Digitizing and Probing cycles will not run unless a probe or touch-off block is connected.
This parameter is used to prevent the tool or probe from crashing into the table. The default for this parameter is 0,
which disables this feature.
Console Type/Model Input Number PLC Type/Model Input Number

M39 10 DC3IO 15
M39s 15 RTK3 15
M400 10 Servo3IO 5
M400s 15 PLCIO2 10
M15-10 5 15/15 10
M400 ATC (RTK3) 15 RTK2 10
M400 ATC (PLCIO2) 10 Koyo ATC 2
Parameter 19 - MPG modes

The MPG is a hand-held device that is used as an alternate way of jogging the machine. This parameter defines the
MPG’s mode of operation. Bit 0 will enable the MPG on power up. Bit 1 will enable the x100 speed limit. Bit 2 will
allow the z-axis to be moved with the MPG while running a job independent of the x and y axes, it also enables
parameters 45, 46 and 47 which define Z axis MPG operation.

0 MPG always active Yes = 1, No = 0
1 MPG speed limit x100 = 2, x10 = 0
2 Enable Z axis MPG Yes = 4, No = 0
Parameters 20-30 - Motor Temperature Estimation

These parameters are used for motor temperature estimation. Parameters 20, 29 and 30 correspond respectively to the
ambient temperature of the shop, the overheat warning temperature, and the job cancellation temperature, all in
degrees Fahrenheit. Parameters 21 through 24 are the heating coefficients for each of the four axes. Parameters 25
through 28 are the cooling coefficients for each of the four axes.
DC Brush Motors and Drives

Parameter Axis Values Values Values Values Values
Servo 8A Drive, 12A Drive, 15A Drive, 15A Drive, 25A Drive,
Drive 15 in/lb motors 29 in/lb motors 29 in/lb motors 40 in/lb motors 40 in/lb motors
20 N/A 72 72 72 72 72
21 X 0.028 0.02 0.027 0.03 0.04
22 Y 0.028 0.02 0.027 0.03 0.04
23 Z 0.028 0.02 0.027 0.03 0.04
24 4TH 0.028 0.02 0.027 0.03 0.04
25 X 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68
26 Y 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68
27 Z 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68
28 4TH 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68
29 ALL 150 150 150 150 150
30 ALL 180 180 180 180 180

AC Brushless Motors and Drives
Parameter Axis Values Values Values
SD SD3, SD1 SD3, SD1 SD1 45A (finned heatsink)
Drive 750 W motors 1,2 KW Motors 3 KW motors
20 N/A 72 72 72
21 X 0.05 0.04 0.23
22 Y 0.05 0.04 0.23
23 Z 0.05 0.04 0.23
24 4TH 0.05 0.04 0.23
25 X 0.68 0.68 12.0
26 Y 0.68 0.68 12.0
27 Z 0.68 0.68 12.0
28 4TH 0.68 0.68 12.0
29 ALL 150 150 150
30 ALL 180 180 180
Parameter 31 – Spindle Speed Output Port

Parameter 31 determines the destination for the raw spindle speeds generated and outputted by the Control. Below are
the possible values for this parameter. Note; if your machine uses a serial type spindle controller, you should not set
this parameter to 0.
Value Meaning
-1 DC3IO/RTK3/PLCIO2/Koyo PLC Direct (12-bit resolution)
0 RTK2 or 15/15 PLC (8-bit resolution)
1 COM1 - SPIN232, SERVO3IO, or to 3rd-party serial interface (12-bit resolution)
2 COM2 - SPIN232, SERVO3IO, or to 3rd-party serial interface (12-bit resolution)
Parameter 32 - Spindle Vector Drive Serial Port Baud Rate

This parameter is for the baud rate (e.g. 9600, 19200, etc.) of the serial port at which the control should communicate
with the SPIN232 board. This parameter is only used if Parameter 31 is set to 1 or 2, for COM1 or COM2 spindle
speed output.
Parameter 33 - Spindle Motor Gear Ratio (Baldor Vector Drive Only)

Warning - The default value for this parameter is 1 and should not be changed unless you have consulted your dealer
or local Technical representative!!!
Parameter 33 is used for the gear or belt ratio between the spindle motor and the chuck in high gear range. It should be
greater than 1.0 if the motor turns faster than the chuck and less than 1.0 if the chuck turns faster than the motor. Note:
this value applies to high range. The ratio between high range and lower ranges is established by the gear ratio
parameters (65-67).
Parameter 34 - Spindle Encoder Counts/Rev

This parameter controls the counts/revolution for the spindle encoder. If the encoder counts up when running CW
(M3), the value of this parameter must be positive. If the encoder counts up when running CCW (M4), the value of
this parameter must be negative.

Parameter 35 – Spindle Encoder Input
This parameter specifies the axis input to which the spindle encoder is connected. Input from the spindle encoder is
required for the spindle-slaved movements used in the Rigid Tapping cycles. Otherwise, this value is generally
ignored. A value of 2 means the third encoder input; a value of 3 means the fourth encoder input; a value of 4 means
the fifth encoder input. A value of 5 is used for the 6th axis encoder input; this is used on SD3 based systems.
Spindle Encoder Plugged into? DC System Value AC System Value

CPU10 Encoder input 1 N/A N/A
CPU10 Encoder input 2 1 17
CPU10 Encoder input 6 N/A 21
SD3 spindle encoder input N/A 5
Parameter 36 - Rigid Tapping Enable/Disable

This parameter is a 3-bit field that enables or disables Rigid Tapping and its options. Bit 1 and 2 have no meaning
unless bit 0 is turned on.

0 Enable Rigid Tapping? Yes = 1, No = 0
1 Suppress sending "Wait for Index Pulse" during Rigid Tapping? Yes = 2, No = 0
2 Allow Spindle Override during Rigid Tapping? Yes = 4, No = 0
Parameter 37 - Spindle Deceleration Time

This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter 36 when rigid tapping is enabled. This sets the amount of time
required for the spindle to decelerate before it switches direction during a rigid tapping operation.
Parameter 38 - Multi-Axis Max Feedrate

This parameter is used to limit the feedrate along all commanded move vectors. This parameter can be used to limit
the speed of multi-axis moves on machines that may have enough power to move a single axis rapidly, but starve out
of power on 2 or 3 axis rapid moves. A zero in this parameter will disable this feature.
Parameter 39 - Feedrate Override Percentage Limit

This parameter is used for limiting the upper end of the Feedrate Override Knob percentage to a value from 100% to
200%. This parameter can be used to restrict the Feedrate Override Knob effect on machines with maximum rates
over 200 in/min. The Feedrate Override Knob percentage is normally allowed to go to 200%. However, on machines
with high cutting speeds, if the knob is turned up to 200%, it creates overshoots on corners. If this parameter is set to
something like 110, it will stop the Feedrate Override Knob from exceeding 110% and thus causes the overshoots to
disappear. AC systems cannot have a maximum feedrate above 100%.
Parameter 40 - Basic Jog Increment

This parameter holds the basic jog increment (0.0001" or 0.002 mm by default). This value is used by the x1, x10, and
x100 jog keys (0.0001, 0.001 and 0.01 on older consoles); it also specifies the distance per click for handwheels
(MPG).

Parameter 41 - Handwheel x100 Speed, User Jog Increment
On newer consoles, this parameter holds the actual handwheel speed in x100 mode. For normal x100 operation it
should be 100. On some systems x100 is way too fast and this value is set to a more reasonable value such as 20 or 30.
On older consoles, this parameter holds the user jog increment (0.250" or 1.0 mm by default). The 0.250 jog key on
older consoles uses this value.
Parameter 42 – Password for Configuration Menus

This parameter determines the password that the user must enter in order to gain full access to the configuration
menus.
Value Meaning
54.0 No password required for supervisor access; the user is not
prompted for a password
ABCD.ABCD Password is 4 digits represented by “ABCD”
Any other number Password is “137”
Parameter 43 – Automatic tool measurement options

This parameter is a 2-bit field that is used to configure properties of the TT1.
Bit Function Parameter Value

0 The height of the tool detector (parameter 71) will be subtracted from the Yes = 1; No = 0
measured height of the tool.
1 Which PLC input to use for the Tool Z reference measurement Use Parameter 11 = 0
Use Parameter 44 = 2
Parameter 44 – TT1 PLC input number

This parameter is the input number that the TT1 is wired into on the PLC. If a shared PLC input is used for the TT1
and the DP4 probe, then the value can be left at zero or set to the same value as parameter #11.
Warning: If using a different PLC input for the TT1 and DP4, when setting the Z reference in the tool library with the
DP4 don’t use a ruby probe tip. The TT1 is continuity based and the ruby tip is not conductive!
Parameter 45 – Z-axis MPG enable PLC input

PLC input number that is used by the aux key or switch that you want to use to toggle between normal Z-axis
operation and Z-axis MPG operation. This input must be held closed in order for the function to remain active. For
this reason, it is recommended that a non-physical input (M-functions INP 33-48) be entered for this parameter, which
can then be mapped in the PLC program to an Aux key if desired.
Parameter 46 – Z-axis MPG handwheel Turns Ratio

This value is the number of clicks (detents) per revolution, if the MPG does not have detents use a value of 100.
Parameter 47 – Z-axis MPG handwheel encoder counts

This value is the number of counts generated per rotation of the handwheel. The higher the encoder counts the
smoother the operation.

Parameter 56 – Feedrate Override Display Properties
This parameter is a 3-bit field that is used to define how the federate override is displayed in the status window.
Bit Function Parameter Value

0 Not used
1 Display programmed rate not actual Yes = 2; No = 0
2 Display a bar meter of percentage Yes = 4; No = 0
Parameter 60 - Digital Filter Size

This parameter defines the PID output filter size for the motor outputs. This parameter is meant to provide a software
filter where no hardware filter exists in order to slow down the PID output frequency (normally 4000 times/sec.), or to
supplement a hardware filter that appears to be inadequate. It is the number of samples to average the PID output over.
For example, a value of 2 says to average the PID output over 2 samples, which would reduce the PID output
frequency to 2000 (4000/2) times/sec. The default value of this parameter is 1 (no averaging).
Parameters 61-62 - Stall Detection Parameters

The M-Series control will detect and report several stall conditions. The low power stall occurs if the control has been
applying a specified minimum current for a specified time, and no encoder motion has been detected. This may
indicate a loose or severed encoder cable. A high power stall occurs if the control has been applying at least 90%
current for a specified time, and no motion greater than 0.0005" has been detected. This may indicate a physical
obstruction.
Parameter 61 is the time limit, in seconds, for a high power stall. The default is 0.5 seconds.
Parameter 62 is the PID output threshold for a high power stall. The default is 115.
Parameter 63 - High Power Idle PID Multiplier

This parameter holds the value of a constant used for motor temperature estimation when an axis is not moving and no
job is running, but there is power going into the motor to maintain its position. The default value is 1.5. This
temperature estimation is intended for early detection of an axis if it’s stopped against some abnormal resistance, such
that it will probably overheat later.
Parameter 64 – Fourth/Fifth Axis Pairing

This feature enables the 4th and 5th axes to be paired together or individually be run in a slaved state with any of the
other axes. This is intended to drive 2 screws on opposite sides of a table (probably a router table or gantry system).
Set this parameter to 0 (default) to indicate that no other axis is paired with the 4th or 5th axis. In order to pair both the
4th and 5th axes on the same system add the 4th axis value with the 5th axis value. Example: 4th axis paired with the X-
axis and 5th axis paired with the Z-axis a value of 65 would be entered into parameter 64. The axes are slaved upon
power up but it is still possible to move the paired (4th or 5th) axis independently if the axis is labeled.
Value Meaning
0 No Pairing (Default)
1 Pair 4th axis with X Axis
2 Pair 4th axis with Y Axis
3 Pair 4th axis with Z Axis
16 Pair 5th axis with X Axis
32 Pair 5th axis with Y Axis
64 Pair 5th axis with Z Axis
128 Pair 5th axis with 4th Axis

Parameters 65-67 - Spindle Gear Ratios
These parameters tell the control the gear ratios for a multi-range spindle drive. Up to four speed ranges are supported;
high range is the default. Parameters 65-67 specify the gear ratio for each lower range, relative to high range. For
example, if the machine is a mill with a dual range spindle, and the spindle in low range turns 1/10 the speed it turns in
high range, then parameter 65 should be set to 0.1.
Parameter 65 is the low range gear ratio.

Parameter 66 is the medium-low range gear ratio.
Parameter 67 is the medium-high range gear ratio.
These parameters work in conjunction with the PLC program, which uses the states of INP63 and INP64 to signal to
the CNC10 software which range is in effect, according to the table below.
Spindle Range
PLC INPUT High Range Medium High Range Medium Low Range Low Range
INP63 0 1 1 0
INP64 0 0 1 1
Parameter 68 – Minimum Rigid Tapping Spindle Speed

This parameter holds the value that the spindle slows down to from the programmed spindle speed towards the end of
the tapping cycle. The lower the value, the more accurately the Z-axis will land on target, but at the expense of
possibly stalling the spindle motor which in turn will cause Z-axis to fall short. If this value is too large, the off target
error increases. The suggested starting value is 100 RPM.
Parameter 69 – Duration for Minimum Spindle Speed Mode

This is the duration of time, in seconds, that the control will stay at minimum spindle speed. If the number is too small,
overshoot will occur. If the number is too large, the user waits longer for the hole to be tapped at the slow speed
specified by parameter 68. The suggested starting value is 1.25 seconds.
Parameter 70 - Offset Library Inc/Decrement Amount

Sets the increment and decrement amount used in the offset library.
Parameter 71 – Part Setup Detector Height

If this Parameter is set to a non-zero value, it indicates that the F3 - Auto feature in part setup should be available
using the tool detector (TT1) instead of the probe. The value in this parameter is the height of the detector. A value of
0 disables this feature.
When this feature is enabled:

a) Probe detection (Parameter 18) is not checked
b) The tool number and/or edge finder diameter entered by the operator are used; Parameter 12 is ignored.
c) The value from Parameter 71 is added to (or subtracted from, depending on approach direction) the part position.

Parameter 72 – Data M Function Options
The setting of this parameter affects the operation of the data M functions M122 and M123.

0 Suppress output of axis labels by M122? Yes = 1, No = 0
1 Insert commas between positions/values with M122 and M123? Yes = 2, No = 0
2 Suppress spaces between positions/values outputted by M122 and M123? Yes = 4, No = 0
Parameters 73, 74 - Canned Cycle Parameters

P74 specifies the number of the M-function that is executed at the bottom of the G74 or G84 tapping cycle.
P73 specifies the retract amount used during a G73 peck drilling cycle.
Parameter 75 – Summing Display Control

This parameter indicates which axes are to be summed and how the results are to be displayed on the DRO. The
parameter can contain up to four digits. The position and value of each digit has special significance as indicated in
the tables below:
Digit Value Meaning
Parameter Digit Position Axis Display Controlled 0 Summing off
1's Column Axis 1 1–4 Axis to Sum
10's Column Axis 2 5 (Reserved)
100's Column Axis 3 6 Disable display
1,000's Column Axis 4 7 Display if moved
8 Display if other moves
9 (Reserved)
Here are some examples using the axis summing display parameter:
Desired Display Parameter
Sum Z-axis (3) with M (4), display sum in Z DRO position 400
Sum Z-axis (3) with M (4), display sum in M DRO position. 3000
Sum Z-axis (3) with M (4), display sum in Z DRO position, and
6400
suppress M display.
Sum Z-axis (3) with M (4), display sum in M DRO position, and
3600
suppress Z display.
Sum Z-axis (3) with M (4), display sum in Z DRO position, and show 6300
M only if M moves.
Sum Z-axis (3) with M (4), display sum in Z DRO position, and show
7400
M if either Z moves.
The DRO will display both labels when displaying a summed axis. For example, "ZM" or "MZ" depending on where
the sum is displayed.

Parameter 76 – Manual Input Unrestricted Distance
This parameter is intended to be used with Z-axis summing. It defines the maximum distance from the summed axis
start of travel in which manual movements can occur without causing a fault. Use a negative value to specify a
distance from the minus travel limit, a positive value for a distance from the plus travel limit.
When used with manual drilling, for example, setting this parameter will allow the operator to keep a hand on the quill
at all times and even begin pulling on the quill in anticipation of a programmed stop.
Setting this value to zero will cause a fault if there is any manual movement.
To completely disable manual movement restrictions, set this parameter to a value exceeding the total travel of the
summed axis.
Minimum = -99999.9999, maximum = 9999.9999, default = 0, typical = +/- 1.0 inch or +/- 20.0 mm
Parameter 77 – Manual Input Movement Tolerance

This parameter specifies the manual movement tolerance while a job is running. It is intended for use with a quill
locking mechanism. It allows the lock to distort and/or slip a small amount when under stress. If the quill moves more
than the given tolerance, the job will stop with a fault. A typical setting for Parameter 77 is 0.005 inches.
Parameter 78 – Spindle Speed Display and Operations

Bit 0 specifies how the spindle speed is determined and displayed in the CNC10 status window. When set to 1.0, the
spindle speed is determined by reading the encoder feedback from the axis specified according to parameter 35.
Which has the number of encoder counts/revolution specified in parameter 34. When set to 0.0, the displayed speed is
not measured; the speed is calculated based upon the set speed, spindle override adjustment, and gear range. Bit 1
allows the control to slow the programmed feed rate if the spindle speed slows down. Bit 2 will make the control wait
until spindle at speed is at least the set percentage that is set in parameter 149.
Bit Function Value

0 Display actual spindle speed Yes = 1, No = 0
1 Slave feed rate to programmed spindle speed Yes = 2, No = 0
2 Wait for spindle at speed Yes = 4, No = 0
Parameter 79 – Auto Brake Mode PLC Bit for Uniconsole-2

This parameter specifies which PLC bit signals the state of automatic brake mode when using the Uniconsole-2
console type. For other console types, it has no effect. This parameter can be changed to allow the Auto Brake mode
key to be located in different positions on the Uniconsole-2 jog panel. The PLC program must be updated to reflect
any change in this parameter.
Parameter 80 – Voltage Brake Message Frequency

This parameter specifies the number of times the “450 Voltage brake applied” message has to occur before we show it
in the message window and message log. A value of 0 or 1 will display the message for every instance that it occurs.
Parameter 81 – Canned Cycle Parameter

P81 (when not equal to –1.0) specifies the M-function to be called in place of Z-axis movement during a G81 drilling
cycle.

Parameter 82 – Spindle Drift Adjustment
This value is the number of degrees that the spindle will take to coast to a stop, when the spindle is turned off at the
minimum spindle speed specified by parameter 68.

Parameter 83 specifies the clearance amount used during a G82 deep hole drilling cycle.

Parameter 84 specifies the number of the M-function that is executed after the return to the initial point of a G74 or
G84 tapping cycle.
Parameters 87-90 - Autotune Accel Time and Ka

These parameters are used by autotune. Increasing the value will lengthen acceleration time and reduce the ka value
given by autotune. Lowering the value will decrease the acceleration time and increase Ka. First set the parameters
and then run autotune. The default value is 48 for DC systems and 36 for AC systems. The maximum value is 64 and
the minimum value is 1. For the fifth axis, use parameter 152.
Parameters 91-94 – Axis Properties

These parameters may be used to set various axis properties, specifically the X, Y, Z and fourth axis.

0 Rotary/Linear Axis Selection Rotary Axis = 1, Linear Axis = 0
1 Rotary Display Mode Wrap Around = 2, Show Rotations = 0
2 Suppress direction check when doing Tool Check? Don’t Check = 4, Check = 0
3 Suppress park function? Don’t Park = 8, Park = 0
4 NOT USED ON MILL
5 Linear Display of Rotary Axis Linear Display = 32, Default Rotary = 0
6 4th Axis works like Z axis Yes = 64, No = 0
7 NOT USED ON MILL
8 Tilt rotary axis Yes = 256, No = 0
9 Hide an axis display from DRO Yes = 512, No = 0
Bit 0: Turning this bit on will cause the DRO display for the affected axis to be displayed in degrees. Also this
information is used by Intercon to make rotary axis support available (by setting parameter 94 to 1, indicating that the
fourth axis is rotary). This bit is also used when performing inch/mm conversions: values for a rotary axis will not be
converted since they are assumed to be in degrees regardless of the system of linear units.
Bit 1: This bit has no effect unless Bit 0 (mentioned above) is turned on. When this bit is turned on, a “Wrap Around”
display is shown on the DRO. A “Wrap Around” Rotary Display is a display in degrees without the number of
rotations shown. If this bit is turned off, the number of rotations away from 0 degrees will be shown alongside the
degree display.
Bit 2: This bit will only affect the Z-axis. It controls whether or not a direction check will be performed when the
Tool Check button is pressed. If this bit is turned on, direction checking is turned off, and thus, there is a possibility
for the Z-axis to move downward unexpectedly, depending on the Z value of Return Point #1 (G28). Therefore, it is
best in most cases to leave this bit turned off to allow direction checking to be turned on (value = 0).
Bit 5: This setting overrides only the DRO display options for an axis that has bit 0 set (including the Rotary Display
Mode – bit 1) so that the display does not reflect a degree symbol or any indication of the number of rotations, but
appears as a linear axis.
Bit 6: This bit only works for Parameter 94 (4th axis). Setting this bit will cause the 4th axis to respond to Z-axis only
commands just like the Z-axis, for example issuing an M25 with this bit set will cause the Z and 4th axes to go the
home (G28) position.
Parameters 95-98 - Autotune Move Distance
These parameters hold the maximum distance that the control will move each axis in either direction from the starting
point when Autotune is executed. The default value for these parameters is 2.0 inches. The fifth axis Autotune
distance is set in parameter 156.
Parameter 99 – Cutter Compensation Look-ahead

This parameter sets the default number of line or arc events for the G-code interpreter to scan ahead when Cutter
Compensation (G41 or G42) is active. Values of 1 to 10 are allowed for this parameter and default is 2.
Parameters 100–115 - Intercon parameters

These parameters are some of the Intercon setup parameters. See Chapter 10 for more information about these
parameters. Changing values will change Intercon settings and may affect the output of the G-code program if it is re-
posted.
Parameter 120 – Probe Stuck Clearance Amount

This parameter specifies the distance that digitizing or probing functions will move to try to clear a stuck probe
condition. A stuck probe condition exists when the probe detects a point and then moves away but the probe input has
not changed. It is recommended that this parameter should not be changed from its default value without consulting a
qualified technician.
Parameter 121 – Grid digitize prediction minimum Z pullback

This parameter specifies the minimum distance the Z-axis will move upward when pulling back from a surface. The
digitizing function attempts to predict the slope of a part surface because time is saved when the Z-axis does not have
to travel upward to the starting Z depth for every digitized point. When probe contact is made traversing in the XY
plane, this parameter specifies the minimum distance the Z-axis moves upward before attempting another XY plane
move. Smaller values are better when the surface being digitized has smooth curves. Larger values are better for
surfaces that have steep walls. It is recommended that this parameter should not be changed from its default value
without consulting a qualified technician.
Parameter 122 – Grid digitizing deadband move distance

This parameter specifies a deadband distance used for internal calculations when doing a clearance move. It is
recommended that this parameter should not be changed from its default value.
Parameter 123 – Radial Clearance Move

This parameter only applies to radial digitizing and determines what type of positioning move the digitizing probe will
make should it encounter an unexpected probe contact with the surface of the part during Radial Digitizing.
Unexpected probe contact is defined as probe contact occurring while the probe is traversing towards the user defined
center point.
With Parameter 123 set to 0: When the probe encounters an unexpected probe contact, the digitizing program stops
data collection. The control then prompts the operator to jog the probe to a clear position. This can be any place inside
the digitizing radius and above the part, that the probe stylus has a clear path to the defined center position. To restart
data collection press Cycle Start. The probe moves in the XY plane from the position the operator placed it at, to the
center position defined in the radial setup menu. After reaching the center position, the probe will feed down to the Z-
axis position it was at when the data collection was interrupted. The digitizing run will resume with the probe
approaching from the defined center position.
With Parameter 123 set to 1: When the probe encounters an unexpected probe contact, it will automatically move (with
probe detection turned off) to the maximum Z height, then moves the X and Y-axis to the defined center position. The
probe will then move to the Z position it was at when the unexpected contact occurred. It will then move from the
defined center position, towards the measurement position it was trying to approach when the unexpected probe
contact occurred and continue digitizing.
With Parameter 123 set to 2: When the probe encounters an unexpected probe contact, it will automatically move back
to the defined center position (with probe detection turned off), at its present Z height. It will then move from the
defined center position, towards the measurement position it was trying to approach when the unexpected probe
contact occurred and continue digitizing.
Warning! Settings 1 and 2 should only be used with extreme caution because probe detection during some
positioning moves is turned off, and damage to the probe or work piece could occur!
Parameters 124-127 PLC Inputs for Jogging

Parameters 124 – 127 allow up to 4 PLC inputs to be used for jogging of the first 2 axes on the control. The first 2
digits (1’s and 10’s) of the parameter specify the axis and direction; the 3rd and 4th digits (100’s and 1000’s) specify the
PLC input being used.
1’s and 10’s digit Function
40 Jog first axis minus
41 Jog first axis plus
42 Jog second axis minus
43 Jog second axis plus
For example: A value of 840 in parameter 124 will cause the first axis to jog minus when the PLC input 8 is closed and
stop jogging when the PLC input 8 is opened, A value of 1243 in parameter 127 will cause the second axis to jog
minus when the PLC input 12 is closed and stop jogging when the PLC input 12 is opened.
Parameter 128 – Handwheel (MPG) Mapping

This parameter selects how the axes are paired for handwheel operation. Each digit in the displayed number represents
an axis. The first axis is at the far right. The value of each digit represents the companion axis, 1 to 5. A zero digit
means no pairing. The table below shows how the digits are mapped to axes:
Axis: 5 . 4 3 2 1
Parameter value 0 . 0 0 0 0
Axis/Companion
Example Value 5 4 3 2 1 Comments
0.0000 No pairing.
0.1000 1 4 Axes 1 & 4 paired.
0.2100 2 1 Axes 1 & 3, 2 & 4 paired.
0.0021 2 1 Invalid – does nothing. Axes are paired with themselves.
Only manual axes that are paired with powered axes will produce a valid configuration. Manual axes specified by
Parameter 128 must be properly configured as handwheel axes in the Motor Parameters screen of the Machine
Configuration. See the Machine Configuration section earlier in this chapter.
Parameter 129 – Handwheel (MPG) Display

By default, manual axes paired by Parameter 128 are not displayed in the DRO. This parameter enables the display of
the manual axis in the DRO, if desired. The parameter has the same axis mapping for each digit as shown in Parameter
128. To display an otherwise hidden manual axis, set the digit corresponding to the axis number to a “1”. For
example, “0.1000” would display axis 4, if it is a manual axis that is paired with some other powered axis.
Parameter 130 – Z-axis on/off selection (see Parameter 131)

Parameter 131 – 4th axis on/off selection (only uses 1’s and 10’s digit)
These parameters control the display of the 3rd and 4th axes, respectively. The tens digit of the parameter value
specifies the label of the affected axis when it is enabled, with values 1-9 corresponding to axis labels ABCUVWXYZ.
The ones digit specifies the label of the axis when it is disabled, with 0.0 meaning the axis is not switchable, 1.0
meaning it turns off (N), a 2.0 meaning manual (M), and a 3.0 meaning 2-axis with manual Z (@). P130 also supports
additional modes depending upon the value of the hundreds digit. For example, a value of 92 will toggle between a
3rd axis Z and a 3rd axis M and power off just the Z-axis. A value of 192 will toggle the 3rd axis between Z and M
and power off all axes. A value of 392 will toggle the 3rd axis label between Z and M and power off all axes and
receive its positions from the 4th axis encoder input. When P130/P131 are configured for axis switching, the Setup
menu displays function keys F5/F6 to switch the axes.
Parameter 130 Options:
Hundred’s Digit Function Description Parameter Value (add

Bit1 Axis motor power when switching to two-axis 1 = power all axes off, 0 = power 3rd off only
mode.
Bit2 Use 4th encoder input for scale input 2 = Use 4th encoder input, 0 = no manual input
Bit3 Use 5th encoder input for scale input 4 = Use 5th encoder input, 0 = no manual input
Enabled Axis: A B C U V W X Y Z
Ten’s Digit 1 2 3 4 4 6 7 8 9
Disabled Axis: N M @
One’s Digit 1 2 3
Parameters 132 – 5th Axis Heating Coefficient

This parameter sets the heating coefficient for the 5th axis. See parameters 20-30 for more information.
Parameters 136 – 5th Axis Cooling Coefficient

This parameter sets the cooling coefficient for the 5th axis. See parameters 20-30 for more information.
Parameter 140 – Message log priority level

This parameter controls the messages that are written to the message log, which can be accessed through the F9 - Logs
function in the Utilities menu. With the priority Level set to 1, CNC10 logs numbered error messages and most other
messages except "Moving...", "Jogging...", "Stopped", etc. At priority Level = 9, all messages are logged including
user prompts. Message logging can be disabled be setting this parameter to –1.
Parameter 141 – Maximum message log lines

This parameter is the number of lines that will be kept in the message log. If this parameter is set to 10,000, for
example, the newest 10,000 messages will be retained. CNC10 will delete the oldest messages, trimming the log file
to the given number of lines at startup and periodically while CNC10 is in an idle state. Parameter 142 controls the
frequency of the log cleanup.

Parameter 142 – Message log trim amount
This parameter is the number of additional lines above the minimum that can be added to the log before it is reduced to
the minimum size. Setting this parameter to a lower value will cause the log file to be trimmed to its minimum size
more often. The higher the value, the less often the log will be trimmed. The speed of the disk drive and total size of
the log file at the time it is trimmed will determine how long the log cleanup takes. Under most circumstances, using
10,000 and 1,000 for parameters 141 and 142 will provide a reasonable and useful log size with no noticeable effects
on performance. If parameters 141 and 142 are set to excessively high values, the message "Trimming excess lines
from log file" will be presented. This message will appear at startup and very infrequently when CNC10 is idle.
Normal operation can proceed after the message disappears. If the delay is unacceptable, reduce the values of
parameters 141 and 142.
Parameter 143 – DRO Properties (load meters, 4/5 digits, DTG)

This parameter controls the display of the axis load meters and 4/5 digit DRO precision.

0 Enable Load Meters Enable = 1, Disable = 0
1 Load Meter Outline Enable = 2, Disable = 0
2 DRO 4/5 Digit Precision 5 digits = 4, 4 digits = 0
3 Mini DRO (Distance to Go) Enable = 8, Disable = 0
Use a value of 3 to display load meters with outlines. The axis load meters will be colored green for values that are up
to 70% of maximum power output, yellow for values between 70% and 90%, and red for values between 90% and
100%. The axis load meters appear below the DRO for each axis (see Chapter 1).
Parameter 144 – Comparison Rounding

This parameter determines the built in rounding for the comparison operators (‘EQ’, ‘NE’, ‘LT’, ‘GT’, etc.) in
expressions. Rounding of comparison arguments is necessary due to extremely small errors that are part of every
floating-point calculation. The result of such errors is that two floating-point values are rarely exactly equal. The
value of parameter 144 represents the precision of comparison in places after the decimal point. If the parameter is set
to 9.0, for example, then comparison operators will declare two numbers that differ in value by less than 0.0000000005
as being equal. The value 0.0 is a special value that turns comparison rounding off. When comparison rounding is off,
it is up to the G code programmer to build the precision into conditional statements, for example “IF ABS[#A - #B] LT
0.00005 THEN GOTO 100”. When comparison rounding is off, the “EQ” usually returns “false”. If parameter 144 is
set to 9, the programmer can shorten the previous example to “IF #A EQ #B THEN GOTO 100”.
Parameter 145 – Advanced Macro Properties (Fast Branching)

This parameter turns fast branching on (1) and off (0). The other bits of this parameter are reserved for future use.
If fast branching is disabled, CNC10 searches forward in the program for the first matching block number and resumes
searching, if necessary, from the top of the program. For this reason, backward branches take longer than forward
branches and backward branch times depend on the total program size. If the program is significantly large, use of the
GOTO statement could introduce temporary pauses.
When fast branching is enabled, CNC10 remembers the locations of block numbers as it finds them during program
execution. Backward branches always take place immediately. The first forward branch to a block not yet
encountered will take additional time as CNC10 searches forward for the block number; however, subsequent forward
branches to that block number will take place immediately. The trade-off for using fast branching is that all line
numbers at a given level of program or subprogram must be unique and programs will use more memory
(approximately 16kilobytes of memory for every 1000 block numbers in the program.)

Parameter 146 – Feed Hold Threshold for Feed Rate Override
This parameter sets the lowest value permitted as the feed rate override percentage before feed hold is engaged. Feed
hold will be released when the override percentage is greater than this value.
Parameter 148 – Fast Jog Before Home Set

This parameter allows you to fast jog before home is set. A value of 1 will enable it.
Parameter 149 – Spindle Speed/Surface Footage Threshold

This parameter defines the threshold at which linear motion will be permitted. It is specified as a percentage of the
programmed spindle speed. For example a value of 80 would inhibit linear motion until 80 percent of the
programmed spindle speed was reached. Adding 4 to parameter 78 enables this parameter.
Parameter 150 – Run-Time Graphics

This parameter controls the default value of the Run-Time Graphics option in the Run Menu. It can also allow you to
display CSR positions when graphing. If this parameter is set to 0.0, the RTG option in the Run Menu defaults to OFF
when CNC10 is started.

0 Sets Run Time Graphics option default to ON Enable = 1, Disable = 0
1 Displays CSR positions in graphing Enable = 2, Disable = 0
Parameters 152 – 5th Axis Autotune Accel Time and Ka

This parameter sets the Autotune accel time and Ka for the 5th axis. See parameters 87-90 for more information.
Parameters 156 – 5th Axis Autotune Move Distance

This parameter sets the autotune move distance for the 5th axis. See parameters 95 – 98 for more information.
Parameter 160 – Enhanced ATC

This parameter controls enhanced automatic tool changer (ATC) options. A value of 1 indicates a nonrandom type of
ATC (carousel ATC) and a value of 2 indicates a random type ATC. A value of 0 disables enhanced ATC features. A
warning is displayed when attempting to enable enhanced ATC features as these features work in conjunction with
specific PLC programs. The enhanced ATC option has the following characteristics:
The beginning of an M6 call, whether it be a customized CNC10.M6 routine or not, flags the job file, setting the ATC
error flag field to 1.
The end of an M6, whether customized or not, performs the following:
(a) The ATC error flag is set to zero.
(b) The tool number displayed on the screen is updated and this value is saved in the CNC10.JOB file.
(c) The tool library bin fields are updated in this manner:
If there was a valid tool in the spindle at the start of the M6, then the tool library bin field for this tool will be updated
with either the “putback” field for that tool (if nonrandom type) or the current ATC carousel position (for random
type). For both random and nonrandom types, the “putback” field is set to 0. The “putback” field is an internal field
for each tool in the tool library. It can be displayed by using the CNC10CONV utility with the –dt option to display
the tool library.
For nonrandom types, the new tool now in the spindle will have its “putback” field updated to the current ATC
carousel position.
For both random and nonrandom types, the new tool now in the spindle has the bin field set to 0.
The current ATC carousel position is constantly monitored. When there is a change, the ATC bin field in the
CNC10.JOB file is updated and the file is saved. The ATC carousel position is read from PLC bits OUT41-OUT48,
which should be written by the PLC program in a binary format (not BCD).

At the start of running a job, to include MDI mode, the ATC error field is checked. If this field is 1, then a warning
message is displayed with a prompt to either clear the fault by entering a ‘Y’ or canceling the job by pressing some
other key.
A tool change is not performed if the requested tool is already in the spindle.
An M107 command sends the bin number for the specified tool number, not the tool number.
For random types, tool changes in Intercon are posted as a tool change (Tnn M6) followed by a pre-fetch command for
the next tool in the program (Tn2 M107). This allows the PLC program to rotate the tool carousel to the next tool
while a job continues with the current tool.
For random types, a job search for a tool number will look for lines of the form Tnn M6, i.e., the search bypasses lines
of the form Tnn M107, which are just pre-fetch commands.
The tool library allows editing of the bin fields to specify which carousel bin number the tools are stored in.
Parameter 161 –ATC Maximum Tool Bins

This parameter sets the number of tool changer bins (carousel positions) used with the enhanced ATC option described
above. PLC programs are responsible for reading this value. The tool library interface uses this parameter to validate
bin fields and perform initialization of the bin fields.
Parameters 166 – 5th Axis Properties

This parameter sets the axis properties for the 5th axis. See parameters 91-94 for more information.
Parameters 170-179 – XPLC Parameters

These parameters are accessed by the XPLC through LP0 - LP9 commands. Parameters 177, 178, 179 have been
standardized for specific applications. Parameter 177 is used for trouble shooting purposes only.
Parameter 178 – Switching PLC States

This parameter can be use to set switch types from NC to NO and some other options. Each Bit corresponds to a
different function. All values are to be added to the current setting. For example, you want to reverse M10 and M11
and parameter 178 has a value of 17. You would change this parameter to be 17 + 256 = 273. Below is a table of
additional functions.
Bit Function Default state Optional State

0 Lube Fault NC NO – add 1
1 Spindle Fault NC NO – add 2
2 Air Fault NC NO – add 4
3 Tool Counter Sensor NC NO – add 8
4 Servo Fault DC AC – add 16
5 Zero Speed Signal NC NO – add 32
6 Orient Complete NC NO – add 64
7 No Reverse Spindle Spindle Reverse No reverse spindle – add 128
8 Reverse Clamp M10 M11 – add 256
9 Spin Range Input NC NO – add 512
Parameters 179 – Lube Pump Operation

This parameter can be configured to control a variety of lube pumps. The value is formatted as MMMSS, MMM for
minutes and SS for seconds. Below is a table of some examples. For more information on setting this parameter please
refer to TB171 or contact your Dealer.
Type of Pump MMM SS Operation

Mechanical/CAM 0 0 179=0 Power is on when machine is running a job or in MDI
Mode
Electronic “lube first” 16 00 179=1600 Holds power on to the pump for 16 minutes of job or
MDI time
Electronic “lube last” 16 00 179=1600 Holds power on to the pump for 16 minutes of job or
MDI time
Direct Controlled 30 15 179=3015 Waits for 30 min of job or MDI time, then applies
Pump power for 15 seconds.
Parameters 180 – File Transfer COM Port

This parameter specifies which COM port will be used for file transfer. Accepted values are 0 disabled and 1-4 for
COM1 – COM4. Setting this parameter to an accepted value other than 0 will provide an F6 - Download and an F7 -
Upload key in the Load Job Menu.
Parameters 181 – File Transfer Baud Rate

This parameter sets the maximum file transfer rate for serial communication. The value of this parameter is in KBaud
and has a range of 1.2 to 115.2. The default is 19.2Kbaud. The longer the serial cable the lower the baud rate that can
be used for file transfer.
Parameters 182 – File Transfer Bit Parameters

This parameter sets the number of data bits, type of parity and the number of stop bits for the serial communication file
transfer. The default value is 801 for 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
Digit Function Value

1’s Stop bits 1 or 2 stop bits accepted
10’s Parity 0 = No Parity; 1 = Even Parity; 2 = Odd Parity
100’s Data bits 5 – 8 data bits accepted
Parameters 183 – File Transfer Flow Control

The setting of this parameter determines the COM port file transfer flow control.
Value Meaning
0 No Flow Control
1 Software (XON/XOFF) Flow Control
2 Hardware (CTS/RTS) Flow Control
Parameters 184 – File Transfer Timeout

This parameter is used for the timeout for downloads. So the value set in this parameter is the amount of time you
have to start the file transfer after the F6 - Download button is pressed or the download will time out. The default
value of this parameter is 10 sec, but can be set from 6 to 600 seconds (10 mins).
Parameters 185 – File Transfer Options

This is a 2 bit parameter to set file transfer options.
Bit Function Value

0 Ignore CR on downloads 1= Yes, 0 = No
1 Translate NL (new line) to CR on upload. 2= Yes, 0 = No

Parameters 188-199 – Aux Key Functions
These parameters are used to assign a function to aux keys 1-12 (i.e. P188 = Aux1 … P199 = Aux12). The following is
the list of possible functions that can be executed when an aux key is pressed.
Function Parameter Value Function Parameter Value

No Function 0 XYZ Set Absolute Zero 16
Input X Axis Position 1 One Shot - Drill Bolt Hole Circle 17
Input Y Axis Position 2 One Shot - Drill Array 18
Input Z Axis Position 3 Jog Axis 1 (+) 21
Set Absolute Zero 4 Jog Axis 2 (+) 22
Set Incremental Zero 5 Jog Axis 3 (+) 23
One Shot - Drill 6 Jog Axis 4 (+) 24
One Shot - Circular Pocket 7 Jog Axis 5 (+) 25
One Shot - Rectangular Frame 8 Jog Axis 1 (-) 31
One Shot - Frame 9 Jog Axis 2 (-) 32
One Shot - Face 10 Jog Axis 3 (-) 33
Execute M Code file m11* Jog Axis 4 (-) 34
Free Axes 14 Jog Axis 5 (-) 35
Power Axes 15
For example, if you wanted Aux4 to call up the Circular Pocket – One Shot. You would set parameter 191 to 7.
The Input Axis Position functions must be used with the Set ABS/INC Zero functions. After entering the desired value
at the input field provided by the Input Axis Position function, press an aux key assigned either the function Set ABS
Zero or Set INC Zero.
* m is the number of the M code to execute. For example, if the parameter value is set to 7211, the file CNC10.M72
will be loaded when the Aux key was pressed and executed after Cycle Start is pressed.
Custom overlays with the keys that represent these functions are available; contact your dealer for pricing.
All remaining parameters are reserved for further expansion.

PID Configuration
Pressing F4 - PID from the Configuration screen will bring up the PID Configuration screen. The PID Configuration
screen provides qualified technicians with a method of changing the PID dependent data to test and configure your
machine. The PID Parameters should not be changed without contacting your dealer. Corrupt or incorrect values
could cause damage to the machine, personal injury, or both.
F1 - PID Parameters
(These parameter values should be recorded on the Control Parameters page at beginning of manual.)
This option is for qualified technicians only. Altering these values will cause DRAMATIC changes in the way the
servo system operates, leading to possible machine damage. DO NOT attempt to change these parameters without
contacting your dealer.
* NOTE: Some of these values are set automatically by the Autotune option. (See F5 – Autotune)
The parameters Kp, Ki, Kd, Limit, Kg, Kv1, and Ka at the top of the window are values used by the PID control
algorithm. These parameters should not be changed at any time. The remaining two PID parameters are acceleration
time and maximum rate. These parameters are described below.
Accel: (Acceleration Time) the time required for an axis to accelerate to its maximum rate. Although each axis has its
own acceleration time, the actual acceleration time used during a job will be the slowest time of all the axes. DO NOT
change this field unless you have a thorough understanding of its operation.
Max Rate: Determines the maximum feedrate of each individual axis. The feedrate on each axis can never exceed
Max Rate, even if the feedrate override knob on the front panel is turned up above 100%. (See also the Machine
Parameters section for the "Multi-Axis Max Feedrate" parameter that limits the feedrate along move vectors, not just
each individual axis.)
* NOTE: The maximum rate may be set to a smaller value if you wish to run your machine at a slower rate.
WARNING: Improper PID values can ruin the machine, cause personal injury, and/or destroy the motor drives!!!
F2 - PID Collection Program

This option allows qualified technicians to test the PID parameters by entering up to 5 lines of G-codes to be executed
with the Collect Data command below.

F3 - Collect Data
This option allows qualified technicians to collect data on the movement of one of the motors. It uses the values
located in the axis and density fields at the bottom of the screen and the PID collection program to collect the data.
When this option is selected, the controller executes the PID collection program and collects data on the selected axis.
The data is saved using the file name entered at the file prompt located at the lower right hand side of the screen. The
information in the lower left hand side of the edit window provides information to qualified technicians about the
selected axis.
F5 - Autotune
This option is used by qualified technicians to automatically determine values for Max Rate, Accel/decel time, and
Deadstart (See section Motor Configuration: Jog Parameters) as well as the PID parameters for each installed axis.
The Autotune procedure will make a series of moves on each axis, traveling up to 2" (see parameters 95-98 and 156 to
change the autotune distance) from the initial position in all directions to determine the friction and gravity of each
axis. The initial high-speed move will use half of this distance. This will allow Autotune to work on axes with less
than 4" of travel, on rotary axes that need more than 1 degree to get up to speed, and on very fast/slow accelerating
machines that need more than 1 inch to get up to speed. (In order to use less than 4", or more than 4 degrees, you must
change the corresponding parameters 95-98 and 156 for 5th axis.)
* NOTE: Do not run Autotune unless requested to do so by a qualified technician.
F6 - Drag
This option is used by qualified technicians to determine whether your machine is binding anywhere along the axis
travel. To run a drag test press F6 - Drag to begin the drag test. Press F1 - Next Axis to select the axis you wish to
check and then hit the CYCLE START button. A text file DRAG_X.OUT, DRAG_Y.OUT, DRAG_Z.OUT, or
DRAG_W.OUT file is generated and stored in the C:\CNC10 directory. If significant drag occurs, a message will be
displayed on-screen. Contact your dealer to correct the problem as soon as possible.
F7 - Laser
This option is used by qualified technicians to take automated laser measurements and create or adjust the ballscrew
compensation tables. Do not attempt to run automatic laser compensation without first contacting your dealer for
details.
F8 - Drive
This menu will only appear on AC systems. It is not for general viewing and definitely not for modification by any
unqualified individual. For more information about this menu option, refer to the SD installation manual.
F9 - Plot
This option is used by qualified technicians to plot data.

Handwheel Configuration
If you are using a manual input as a handwheel (MPG) input, be sure to configure all handwheel/MPG parameters.
This list serves as a guide to configuration of the handwheels. Motor Parameters do not apply to MPG’s that use the
special MPG input. You may configure any unused encoder input as a handwheel input.
Screen Parameter Value Comments

Jog Travel (-), Travel (+) Actual travel limits of the Axis controlled by a handwheel
Parameters For an axis controlled by a powered axis. must have travel limits set.
handwheel.
Motor Label M Handwheel input must be a
Parameters manual axis.
Motor Motor Revs/Unit Number of “clicks” per rev. If the wheel has no detents, use
Parameters 100.
Motor Encoder Counts/Rev Actual number of counts Use higher resolution encoders for
Parameters generated per rotation of the smoother operation.
handwheel.
Motor Lash, Limits, Homes 0, 0, 0 Do not apply to handwheels.
Parameters
Motor Direction reversed, Screw N, N Do not apply to handwheels.
Parameters Compensation
Machine Parameter 19 – MPG Modes As desired to select MPG on at Be sure to enable or disable 100x
Parameters power-up and MPG speed operation here. See Machine
limit. Parameters for more information.
Machine Parameter 40 – Basic Jog 0.0001 in. or 0.002 mm by This specifies the distance per
Parameters Increment default. “click” in x1 mode. Note: Also
used for jogging.
Machine Parameter 41 – Handwheel Set to 100 for 100x movement. This speed will be used in 100x
Parameters 100x Speed, User Jog If this is too fast, choose a mode.
Increment smaller value.
Machine Parameter 128 – Handwheel As needed to achieve the See Machine Parameters for more
Parameters Mapping desired mapping. information.
Machine Parameter 129 – Handwheel 0 will work fine. Handwheel See Machine Parameters for more
Parameters Display display will be suppressed. information.
Machine Parameters 130, 131 – Z and 0 will work fine. See Machine Be aware that use of this feature
Parameters 4th axis on/off Parameters for more may cause the handwheel to be
information. turned on and off when the axis is
switched.
The distance per turn of the handwheel in x1 mode is determined by the following equation:
Distance/Turn = Distance/Click * Clicks/Turn
Parameter 40 is the distance/click. Motor parameter Revs/Unit holds the Clicks/Turn value. You may adjust the
Clicks/Turn value to achieve a different distance per turn. For example, if Parameter 40 is 0.0001 inches and
Clicks/Turn is 100, the distance per turn is 0.01 inches. To get 0.05 inches per turn, use 500 clicks per turn. (This
assumes that the encoder counts per rev is accurate.)
Be aware that Axis Summing parameter (75) may conflict with handwheel configuration. If you wish to use
both handwheels and axis summing, be sure that the manual input for axis summing is the first manual axis.
Axis summing cannot use a manual input that is used as a handwheel.

Chapter 15
CNC10 Messages
CNC10 Startup errors

Error Message Cause Effect Removed
101 Error initializing Missing *.ggf files Exit CNC10 with return Re-install
graphics... cannot code 63. CNC10 software
continue
102 Error initializing Error while sending cnc8.hex. Other Exit CNC10 with return Contact dealer
CPU7... cannot messages with more detail of error code 63.
continue appear on screen before this message.
103 Error sending setup ESC key pressed while sending setup No setup command sent Timed message
(windowed message). to CPU10. CPU10
probably not responding.
104 Error sending PID ESC key pressed while sending PID No PID setup command Timed message
setup (windowed setup. sent to CPU10. CPU10
message). probably not responding
105 cnc10.plc file read Missing or error in cnc10.plc Exit CNC10 with return Contact dealer
error..cannot continue code 63
106 The PC clock appears The time on the PC internal clock is None Start of new job
to be wrong earlier than the time recorded in a
previously stored file
Messages issued upon exit from CNC10

201 Return code 63 CPU10 not responding, or cnc8.hex, Exit CNC10 with Contact dealer
cnc10.plc, or font file is missing or return code 63
damaged
202 Return code 64 (start menu) A floating-point math error occurred Exit CNC10 with Contact dealer.
return code 64 Re-start CNC10
203 Return code 65 (start menu) cnc10.cfg file is missing or damaged Exit CNC10 with Contact dealer
return code 65

Messages and Prompts in the Operator Status Window Status messages
301 Stopped No operations in progress None
302 Moving... Motors are moving while a CNC None
program is running
303 Paused... Motion is paused while a CNC None
program is running (FEED HOLD)
304 MDI... CPU7 running in MDI mode None
305 Processing... CPU7 running in a mode other than None
MDI
306 Job finished Normal end of CNC program None
307 Operator abort: job ESC or CYCLE CANCEL pressed Job canceled Start of new job
canceled
308 Waiting for input M100 or M101 executing. 'Mnn' or 'M6: Insert Tool # After input is
#NN NNN Tool library description' received
message displayed if M
function macro executing
309 Waiting for CYCLE M0, M1, M100/75, or Block Mode 'Block Mode' message After CYCLE
START button displayed if CNC program START pressed
running in block mode
310 Waiting for output M100 or M101 executing 'Mnn' or 'M6: Insert Tool # After output is in
#NN NNN Tool library description' correct state
311 Waiting for memory M100 or M101 executing 'Mnn' or 'M6: Insert Tool # After memory
#NN NNN Tool library description' bit is in correct
message displayed if M state
312 Waiting for PLC PLC program not clearing PLC 'Mnn' or 'M6: Insert Tool # After PLC
operation (Mnn) operation in progress NNN Tool library description' program
message displayed if M completes
function macro executing operation in
progress
313 Waiting for dwell G4 executing 'Mnn' or 'M6: Insert Tool # After specified
time NNN Tool library description' time has elapsed
314 Input search data Run/search key pressed None After search data
input
315 Searching... Run/search in progress None
316 Search complete. Run/search mode. Search successful. None
Processing... Preprocessing job
317 Waiting for M6 executing with automatic tool None After changer
automatic tool changer signals that tool
change change is
complete
318 _ axis too close to Motor shaft is in the wrong position at May result in unreliable Re-align motor
switch the home switch release point homing shaft

Abnormal stops (faults)
Abnormal stops are detected in the following order: PLC, servo drive, spindle drive, lube, ESTOP. This means that if
both the servo drive and the spindle drive have faulted, the servo drive fault message would appear.

401 PLC failure CPU10 stopped with PLC failure Job canceled When PLC failure bit removed. Typical
detected bit set implementation: correct PLC then press
and release EMERGENCY STOP
402 PLC Online PLC has returned on line None
404 Spindle drive CPU10 stopped with spindle Job canceled When spindle drive fault removed by
fault detected drive fault bit set PLC. Typical implementation: Check
inverter for fault or reset spindle
contactor OCR, then press and release
EMERGENCY STOP
405 Lubricant CPU10 stopped with low lube Current job When low lube fault bit removed by PLC.
level low fault bit set continues to Typical implementation: add lube then
run, but a new press and release EMERGENCY STOP
job cannot be
started
406 Emergency CPU10 stopped with no fault bits 'Fault: Job When Emergency Stop released
Stop detected set canceled.'
prompt
407 X+ limit (#1) CPU10 stopped with limit switch Job canceled Start of new job, when limit cleared
tripped status
408 Programmed M103 time expired before M104 Job canceled Start of new job
action timer encountered
expired
409 _ axis lag Lag Distance (Allowable Job canceled 1.If the problem is occasional heavy cuts,
Following Error) is detected on slowing down the cutting feedrate can
any axis for more than 1.5 solve the problem.
seconds. Where: Lag Distance= 2.If the problem only occurs on high
Feedrate inch/min speed moves then either the maximum
--------------------------- speed or the acceleration is set too high.
+ .0005 inch/int Lower the values in the Motor Setup
240,000 ints/min screen or rerun Autotune again to
(Allowable Following Error) determine new values.
All axis motion is stopped and 3.If the problem is persistent lag errors in
the CNC program is aborted. The normal operations it indicates that the
probable causes of this error are: motors are too weak to handle the
1.The machine is doing a very required loads. Increase the gear ratios or
heavy cut. get more powerful motors
2.The maximum rates or the
acceleration values for the
motors are set too high.
3.The motors are undersized for
the application
Note: If the Lag Distance (Allowable Following Error) is exceeded for more than .025 seconds, then no
acceleration will occur on any axis. However, no error message is generated at this point because no fatal error
exists.

410 _ axis position A position error > .25 inches is Job canceled Try a slow jog the motor and watch the
error detected on any axis. All axis DRO position. If the position on the DRO
motion is stopped, power to the goes opposite the direction indicated on
motors is released (all servo the jog button, then the motor is wired up
drive commands cease) and the backwards. Change the motor wiring.
CNC program is aborted. Check the motor cabling paying particular
The probable causes of this attention to the ground connections.
error are: Replace the cable if it is damaged or
1.The motor is wired up repair the motor connections.
backwards. Jog the motor awhile, at the maximum
2.Noise is getting into the rate, using the fast jog buttons. (Check the
system via the motor cables (the fast jog rate in the motor jog parameters
line integrity has been violated). screen to make sure it is set equal to the
3.An encoder error occurred. maximum motor rate.) If the motor seems
to jump around rather than accelerate and
decelerate smoothly then you are
probably fighting an encoder error.
Swap the motor with one from another
axis and see if the error follows the motor.
If it stays with the axis, replace the CPU.
If it follows the motor, replace the motor
cable. If the problem still persists, replace
the motor and encoder.
Start of new job.
411 _ axis full 90% Power (PID Output > 115) Job canceled If the axis has obviously run into a
power without is applied to any axis and no physical stop, use the slow jog mode to
motion motion >.0005 inches is move the axis away from the end. Change
detected, for more than the time the CNC program to remove moves that
specified in parameter 61 are out of bounds or re-zero to a point that
(usually .5 seconds). All axis permits the required CNC moves to be
motion is stopped and the CNC made.
program is aborted. If the axis is not on a physical stop, check
The probable causes of this the limit switch to see if it is tripped. If it
error are: is then the software is commanding a
1.) One of the axes is against a move into the switch but the hardware is
physical stop. shutting the move down. Go to the motor
2.) The servo drive has setup screen and enter the limit switch if
shutdown due to a limit switch this is applicable.
input. Make sure the switch input is not unstable
3.) The Z home switch is the or noisy. If it is then replace the switch. If
same as the Z + limit switch. the problem persists it may be necessary
to create separate home and limit switch
inputs.
Use slow jog to move opposite the
direction causing the error and clear all
limit switches. Jog toward the direction
causing the error, if no motion occurs then
a servo drive failure is indicated.
Start of new job.

412 _ axis encoder Axis is enabled but a differential All axis motion Reconnect encoder or repair
connection is encoder signal is not detected. May is stopped and encoder and/or encoder cable.
bad indicate a loose or severed encoder the CNC
cable or a bad encoder. program is
aborted.
413 CPU Failure CPU10 has experienced a problem Power down, Never - system must be
#01: power with the PC reset line. and then power powered down.
down up the system.
The error
should
disappear.
414 CPU Failure CPU10 detected CPU failure. Power down, Never - system must be
#02: power and then power powered down.
down up the system.
The error
should
disappear.
415 CPU fault #XX Invalid stop reason from CPU10. Power down, Never - system must be
detected and then power powered down.
up the system.
The error
should
disappear.
416 Motion fault Invalid motion status from CPU10. Power down, Never - system must be
#XX detected and then power powered down.
up the system.
The error
should
disappear.
417 Abnormal end Job ended without reason. Job canceled Start of new job.
of job
418 Search data not Requested search input data not found Job canceled Start of new job
found in loaded CNC file. Removed:
Jogging, start of new job, other error.
419 Search line in Requested search line is part of an Job canceled Start of new job
embedded embedded subprogram; Search can
subprogram only be used to start in the main
program.
420 _ axis motor CNC10 estimates that a motor has No effect on a When next message appears
overheating reached the warning temperature (set job, which is
in Parameter 29). currently
running.
However, a
new job cannot
be started until
the motor has
cooled below
the warning
temperature.
421 Motor(s) too CNC10 estimates that one or more The current job Start of new job (after motors
hot: job motors have reached the limit is canceled and have cooled below warning
canceled temperature (set in Parameter 30). power is temperature).
released.

422 Jog Panel Offline Jog panel failure or loose All buttons on By reconnecting jog panel cable and
cable. jog panel are appearance of next message.
inoperative.
423 Jog Panel Online Loose jog panel cable has All buttons on
been reconnected. jog panel are
operative.
424 Feedrate Jog panel failure or loose Feedrate knob By appearance of next message.
Override Offline cable. and some jog
panel keys are
inoperative.
425 Feedrate Loose jog panel cable has Feedrate
Override Online been reconnected. Override knob
is operative.
426 Spindle Override Jog panel failure or loose Spindle knob By appearance of next message.
Offline cable. and some jog
panel keys are
inoperative.
427 Spindle Override Loose jog panel cable has Spindle
Online been reconnected. Override knob
is operative.
428 MPG Offline MPG failure or loose cable. MPG is By reconnecting MPG cable and
inoperative. appearance of next message.
429 MPG Online Loose MPG cable has been MPG is
reconnected. operative.
430 CPU7 PIC Power supply or hardware Power down,
Offline problem. and then power
up the system.
The error
should
disappear.
431 CPU7 PIC CPU7 is back on line. None
Online
432 External PLC Koyo PLC Direct failure or None When PLC failure removed or cable
Offline loose cable. reconnected.
433 External PLC PLC failure corrected. None
Online
434 _ idling too high: Axis is not moving and no Power to Run autotune to adjust motor settings.
Releasing power job is running but axis has motors is Start of new job
stopped against some released.
abnormal resistance.
435 _ axis runaway: Axis was moving more than Power to Start of new job (after wiring or servo
Check motor 300 RPM while power was motors is drive failure has been removed).
wiring supposed to be off. released.
1.) Motor may be wired
backwards.
2.) May be a shorted servo
drive.
3.) Axis motion is canceled
but motor continues to move
due to inertia, which is
probably caused by an
unbalanced axis.

436 Servo drive This error message is produced by The This message is removed and
shutdown hardware detection of a physical error. particular the condition is reset only if the
The servo drive hardware originates this condition ESTOP is pressed and released.
error message if it detects either an can be The PLC program that is
overcurrent or overvoltage condition. resolved by responsible for latching this
The particular hardware condition is observing condition is also responsible for
reflected on the servo drive LEDs. the servo clearing this condition.
Once the servo drive detects this error drive
condition it stops all motion and LEDs.
removes power to the motors. The
hardware indicates the presence of this
condition to the CNC10 software via
the servo drive fault input to the PLC.
437 Servo power Axis was moving more than 300 RPM Power to Start of new job (after wiring or
removed while power was supposed to be off. motors is servo drive failure has been
(Also see error 1.) Motor may be wired backwards. released. removed).
435) 2.) May be a shorted servo drive.
3.) Axis motion is canceled but motor
continues to move due to inertia, which
is probably caused by an unbalanced
axis.
438 Axis cannot keep During a slaved move the axis can not Job Start of new job (after parameter
up with spindle keep up to the spindle speed (i.e. rigid canceled 34 is corrected or the
tapping) programmed spindle RPM is
1.) Check parameter 34 for wrong sign lowered).
in front of encoder counts.
2.) Need to slow down spindle RPM’s.
439 _ axis servo drive Logic power failure or lost of No motor Power complete unit down and
data output error communication from the drive to the power check connections to drive.
CPU10.
441 _ axis Input power has gone higher than No motor Check input voltage is below
overvoltage 340VDC and will shutdown the drive power. 340VDC.
and remove power. The motor brake
will engage for 5 seconds in this
condition.
442 _ axis Drive input power is less than 80 VDC. No motor Check supply voltage.
undervoltage power.
443 _ axis Control detected invalid commutation No motor Performa motor Move Sync in
commutation zone value. power. the Drive menu. A Zero (0) or
encoder bad Seven (7) is an invalid zone.
Check for:
a.) Wiring problem in the
encoder cable or motor end cap
(broken encoder wires).
b.) Encoder cable shield
connected at motor end, when it
shouldn’t be.
c.) Bad encoder.
d.) Motor power cable shields
not connected.
e.) Drive not grounded properly.

444 _ axis overtemperature Drive overtemp sensor No motor The drive is being run at over capacity
detected tripped. power. or the cooling fan is either not
functioning or it’s air flow is blocked.
445 _ axis overcurrent Overcurrent detected on an No motor Try to jog the axis. The drive will reset
detected axis. power. the current limit and try to move the
motor. If the error comes back, check
for a short in the motor output.
446 _ axis synchronization Communication CheckSum No motor Check fiber optic cable.
failure error. power.
447 _ axis (#) bad index Noise picked up by encoder No motor Remove noise or align the encoder.
pulse detected cable or misaligned encoder. power.
CNC syntax errors

501 Invalid character on Invalid character on CNC line. Job canceled Start of new job.
line NNNNN
502 Invalid G code on line Invalid G code encountered on CNC line. Job canceled Start of new job.
NNNNN
503 Invalid M function on Invalid M function encountered on CNC line. Job canceled Start of new job.
line NNNNN
504 Invalid parameter on Invalid or missing number after letter. Job canceled Start of new job.
line NNNNN
505 Invalid value on line Value out of range (T, H, D). Job canceled Start of new job.
NNNNN
506 Only 1 M code per line More than one M code appears on the line. Job canceled Start of new job.
507 No closing quote The closing quotation mark (“) in a quoted string is Job canceled Start of new job.
missing.
508 Macro nesting too Macro nesting limit exceeded on attempt to invoke a Job canceled Start of new job.
deep subroutine.
509 Option not available Attempt to access a locked software option. Job canceled Start of new job.
510 Too many macro Too many arguments were given in a G65 macro Job canceled Start of new job.
arg’s call.
511 Missing parameter A parameter is required or expected but not found. Job canceled Start of new job.
513 Expected “=” Error in expression to left of “=”, missing “=”, or Job canceled Start of new job.
orphaned parameter.
514 Empty expression The expression contains no operands. Job canceled Start of new job.
515 Syntax error in Illegal character in number, variable or function. Job canceled Start of new job.
expression
516 Unmatched bracket Brackets or parentheses are paired improperly or Job canceled Start of new job.
(parenthesis) misplaced.
517 Evaluation stack Brackets or parentheses are nested too deeply. Job canceled Start of new job.
overflow
518 Undefined variable The variable name does not exist. Job canceled Start of new job.
519 Too many variables The space allotted for user-defined variables has Job canceled Start of new job.
been exceeded.
520 Invalid variable name The variable name contains an illegal character. Job canceled Start of new job.
521 Divide by zero Attempt to divide by zero. Job canceled Start of new job.
522 Domain error Imaginary number would result (square root of a Job canceled Start of new job.
negative number).
523 Invalid value in Attempt to assign an illegal value to a system Job canceled Start of new job.
assignment variable.
524 Variable is read-only Attempt to assign a value to a read-only system variable. Job canceled Start of new job.
Cutter compensation errors
601 Error: no compensation G41 or G42 entered in MDI. MDI is not canceled, but cutter
in MDI compensation does NOT go into
effect. Remainder of line processed.
602 Arc as first comp. move Cutter compensation started with Job canceled Start of
on line NNNNN arc as first move. new job.
603 Arc as first uncomp. Arc specified as first move after Job canceled Start of
move on line NNNNN end of compensation (G40). new job.
604 Plane must be XY on Cutter compensation started with Job canceled Start of
line NNNNN YZ or ZX plane selected. new job.
605 Canned cycle not Canned cycle attempted during Job canceled Start of
allowed on line NNNNN compensation. new job.
606 G53 not allowed on line G53 attempted during Job canceled Start of
NNNNN compensation. new job.
607 Set home not allowed on M26 attempted during Job canceled Start of
line NNNNN compensation. new job.
608 Ref. point move not G28, G29, or G30 attempted Job canceled Start of
allowed on line NNNNN during compensation. new job.
609 File read error on look Error reading file used for cutter Job canceled Start of
ahead comp look ahead. new job.
Parameter setting errors

701 G10 error: no R-value on line G10 used with no R-value. Job canceled Start of new job.
NNNNN
702 G10 error: invalid D on line NNNNN G10 D0 Rxx specified. Job canceled (D0 cannot Start of new job.
be set; it is always zero).
703 G10 error: invalid H on line NNNNN G10 H0 Rxx specified. Job canceled (H0 cannot Start of new job.
be set; it is always zero).
704 G10 error: invalid P on line NNNNN G10 used with unknown P Job canceled Start of new job.
value.
705 G10 error: No D, H, or P on line G10 used without D, H, or Job canceled Start of new job.
NNNNN P to assign value.
Canned cycle errors

801 Error: No R point on line NNNNN No R-value specified. Job canceled Start of new job.
802 Error: Q = 0 on line NNNNN Q value of 0 specified (Q used for G73 Job canceled Start of new job.
and G83 only).
803 Error: No Z point on line NNNNN No Z value specified for canned cycle. Job canceled Start of new job.
804 Error: Ggg invalid on line NNNNN Unimplemented canned cycle requested. Job canceled Start of new job.
(gg = 76, 86, 87, 88)
805 Error: No Q value on line NNNNN Q value not specified for G73 or G83. Job canceled Start of new job.
806 Error: No P value on line NNNNN P value (dwell time) not specified for Job canceled Start of new job.
G82 or G89.

Miscellaneous errors
901 Ref. point invalid on G30 with invalid P value (must be 1 or 2). Job canceled Start of new job.
line NNNNN
902 No prior G28 or G30 G29 with no preceding G28 or G30.
on line NNNNN
903 Warning: No G92 with no axis coordinates to set. Remainder of When next
coordinates for G92 line processed; message appears.
on line NNNNN job continues.
904 Invalid plane for arc I, J, or K specified with wrong plane (e.g. K Job canceled Start of new job.
on line NNNNN with G17, or I with G19).
905 Warning: 0 radius arc Arc move was specified with a zero radius. Move is done as When next
on line NNNNN a linear move; message appears.
job continues.
906 Warning: unknown Position of arc move could not be determined Move is done as When next
arc on line NNNNN from parameters (e.g. G91 G2 X0 Y0 R1). a linear move; message appears.
job continues.
907 _ axis travel exceeded Software travel limit would be exceeded by Job canceled Start of new job.
on line NNNNN the requested move.
908 Option not available A code for an extra-cost option was specified, Job canceled Start of new job.
on line NNNNN but the option has not been licensed.
909 Program too long: Attempt to run a job over 1MB in length, Job canceled Start of new job.
job canceled without the unlimited program size option.
910 No subroutines in Specified O9100 - O9999 in MDI, which MDI canceled Start of new job.
MDI would begin an embedded subprogram.
911 Illegal recursion Attempt to execute a subprogram or macro Job canceled Start of new job.
that calls itself, either directly or indirectly.
912 Too many Attempt to run a job with 20 or more levels of Job canceled Start of new job.
subprogram calls subprogram nesting.
913 Could not open file Attempt to call a subprogram or macro, but Job canceled Start of new job.
filename.ext the subprogram file does not exist.
914 Tool library invalid Enhanced ATC is enabled and the tool library Job canceled Start of new job.
for Tnn does not have a valid bin number assigned.
Scaling/Mirroring errors
1001 Invalid scaling parameter Invalid parameter specified (I, J, K, P). Job canceled Start of new job.
on line NNNNN
1002 Invalid scaling center on Invalid parameter specified (X, Y, Z). Job canceled Start of new job.
line NNNNN
1003 G code not allowed when G28/G29/G30/G92 is not allowed when scaling Job canceled Start of new job.
scaling on line NNNNN or mirroring is turned on.
1004 Turn scaling off before Tried to rescale while scaling is turned on. Job canceled Start of new job.
rescaling
1005 Cannot scale arcs with Scaling factors of the arc axes are different. Job canceled Start of new job.
different scale factors
1100- Custom messages defined in cnc10xmsg.txt. Please contact your dealer if you have any questions regarding a
1199 particular message.

M-Series 1.27

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M-Series 1.27

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M-Series 1.27

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CENTROID ™

CNC10 Version 1.27

U.S. Patent #6490500

Machine type (check below)

Message Window Example Error Messages

System Voltages (requires an AC/DC voltmeter)

Axis Kp Ki Kd Limit Kg Kv1 Ka Accel. Max. Vel.

DRO display units:_______ PLC type:__________

CHAPTER 6 – Running a Job CHAPTER 14 – Configuration

DRO Display Window

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 1-1

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 1-2

*CW stands for clockwise, and CCW stands for counterclockwise.

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 1-3

Typical Reference Marks

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 1-4

M00 Stop for operator G00 Rapid Positioning

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 1-5

The M-Series operator panel is a sealed membrane

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 1

Axis Jog Buttons

x1, x10, x100

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 2

Coolant Control Keys

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 3

Auxiliary Function Keys (AUX1 – AUX12)

Spindle Override Controls

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 4

Notes about operator panels

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 5

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 6

Legend Key(s) Function Description Availability (Notes)

Esc Cycle Same as Cycle Cancel. During a job run;

MDI and the Keyboard Jog Panel

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 8

Hot Key Action

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 9

F5 – 3rd Axis Toggle

F6 – 4th Axis Toggle

F1 – Floppy View files on the Floppy drive (a:\ directory)

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 3-2

The screen shows the following keys:

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/5/05 3-4

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 4-1

Set Part Position

1) Select Axis with F1

Axis Part Edge Finder Approach

Setting up the Z AXIS

1) Select Axis with F1

Axis Part Tool

Setting up the 4th or 5th AXIS

Set Part 0/Position

1) Select Axis with F1

Axis Part Standoff Approach

Using Multiple Work Coordinate Systems

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 4-3

1. Move the Edge Finder to the left edge of the part

Axis Part Edge Finder Approach

M-Series Operator’s Manual 10/4/05 4-4

If you wanted the origin offset 1 inch into the part:

DRO display units:_ PLC type:____